JP2019076289A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of preventing decline of game amusement.SOLUTION: In a game machine, a suggestive performance for suggesting whether control to an advantageous state is performed or not according to a mode of a performance executed by prescribed performance means can be executed, and performance assistance display related to the suggestive performance can be executed by display means. The performance assistance display can be executed on each different position according to whether a specific condition is satisfied or not. Hereby, an execution pattern for the performance assistance display is diversified, and decline of game amusement can be prevented.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 25

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

  As a game machine, when a game medium such as a game ball is shot into a game area by a launch device, and the game medium becomes a prize in a prize area such as a prize hole provided in the game area and an execution condition (starting condition) is established, A pachinko game in which the game interest is enhanced by a so-called variable display game, which variably displays a plurality of types of identification information (hereinafter referred to as display symbols) on the variable display device and determines whether or not to impart predetermined gaming value There is a gaming machine. In such a pachinko gaming machine, when the stop symbol mode when the variable display of the display symbol in the variable display game is completely stopped becomes a specific display mode, an advantageous state (big hit gaming state) advantageous for the player is obtained. For example, a pachinko gaming machine that has become a big hit gaming state opens a special electric role called a big winning opening or an attachment, and makes the winning of the gaming ball extremely easy to give the player a predetermined gaming value. Provide for a fixed time continuously. In such pachinko gaming machines, various types of effects are performed to make the player expect the display result to be in the specific display mode before the display result is derived and displayed on the variable display device.

  As such a game machine, a game machine that performs auxiliary display in accordance with the operation of the movable body is disclosed (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP, 2014-104126, A

  However, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, the display pattern of the auxiliary display is monotonous, and there is a possibility that the game interest may be reduced.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-described situation, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing a decrease in game fun.

(1) In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the present invention is:
A gaming machine having display means (e.g., the image display device 5 etc.) and capable of controlling in an advantageous state,
A rendering device capable of performing rendering (for example, a rendering combination 90201);
An operable movable body (e.g., a push button 90120);
Specific effect executing means (for example, step S908120 in the microcomputer 90100 for effect control) which can execute a specific effect (for example, a specific effect of the aspect shown in FIG. 63 (5)) in the vicinity of the movable body using the effect device Part to run),
Movable body control means for operating the movable body (for example, a portion for executing step S908111 in the effect control microcomputer 90100);
While performing the suggestion effect which suggests whether it will be controlled to the above-mentioned advantageous state by the mode of the effect performed by a predetermined production means, the presentation auxiliary display related to the suggestion effect can be executed by the display means A certain suggestion effect execution unit (for example, the effect control CPU 120 that executes the processing of step S804 or step S805);
The movable body control means can operate the movable body when the specific effect is executed (for example, shown in FIG. 63 (5) after the vibration operation of the push button 90120 shown in FIG. 63 (3)). Execute a specific effect),
The suggestion effect execution means can execute the effect auxiliary display at different positions depending on whether or not a specific condition is satisfied (for example, when the determination in step S 803 is YES, the process of step S 805 is performed). Etc),
It is characterized by

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the execution pattern of the presentation assistance display, and to prevent the decrease in the game entertainment.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1),
When the specific condition is satisfied, the suggestion effect execution means can execute the effect support display in the specific display area of the display means (for example, the movement of the movable body in the specific display area of the image display device 5) The effect image is displayed, and the movable body effect can be executed in a mode different from the normal time, etc.),
You may do so.

  According to such a configuration, it can be easily recognized that the specific condition can be established, and the game interest can be improved.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2) above,
Variable display means for performing variable display;
Correspondence display means (for example, effect control CPU 120 that performs hold display or active display) that performs correspondence display corresponding to variable display;
Corresponding display changing means capable of changing the display mode of the corresponding display and enlarging the display area of the corresponding display (for example, in the case where enlargement mode setting for performing enlarged display is performed in the process of step S 807) And a rendering control CPU 120 for performing enlargement control to magnify and display all the pending displays and active displays displayed on the display including the pending display of the advance notice object),
You may do so.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to easily recognize that the display mode of the correspondence display changes, and it is possible to improve the game interest.

(4) In the gaming machine according to (2) or (3),
The predetermined effect means is a movable body (e.g., a movable body 99 or the like) operable according to the effect performed by the display means.
The suggestion effect execution means is capable of operating the movable body and performing presentation support display (for example, displaying an effect image) associated with the operation of the movable body, and when the specific condition is satisfied, Unlike in the case where the specific condition is not satisfied, the auxiliary effect display is performed in the specific display area (for example, the movable body 99 is rotated as a special effect of the movable body and the small screen which is the specific display area is effective) Display an image etc.),
You may do so.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately perform the presentation support display, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

(5) In the gaming machine according to any one of (2) to (4) above,
Variable display means for performing variable display;
Correspondence display means (for example, effect control CPU 120 that performs hold display or active display) that performs correspondence display corresponding to variable display;
Display control means (for example, CPU 120 for presentation control etc. which performs processing of Step S807 or Step S810 etc.) which controls display of the above-mentioned specific display field,
The display control means can display a display other than the correspondence display in the specific display area (for example, a display other than a display relating to a hold / active change effect such as a hold display or an active display, a character image in action effect, etc.) ),
You may do so.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a sense of incongruity which is caused by the correspondence display being displayed in a plurality of display areas.

(6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (2) to (5) above,
The system further comprises an advance notice effect execution unit capable of executing a plurality of types of advance notice effects (for example, the effect control CPU 120 that executes the process of step S814),
The preview presentation effect execution unit can execute the plurality of types of preview presentation effects in the specific display area (if the small screen as the specific display area is displayed, the effect performed in step S814 is Small screen, etc.),
You may do so.

  According to such a configuration, the visibility of the advance notice effect can be improved, and the effect of the effect can be improved, and the game interest can be improved.

(7) In the gaming machine according to any one of (2) to (6) above,
The suggestion effect execution means can further execute a suggestion display effect different from the suggestion effect (for example, hold / active change effect, etc.),
The specific condition is satisfied by the indication effect and the indication display effect being executed in the same period (for example, the identification is performed by performing both the suspension / active change effect for performing the enlargement display and the movable object effect Conditions are met, etc.),
The indication effect execution means ends at least the indication display effect after the end of the indication effect, and ends the display by the specific display area based on the end of the indication display effect (for example, hold / active change) The effect ends after the end of the movable object effect, and the small screen as the specific display area is erased after the end of the hold / active change effect, etc.),
You may do so.

  According to such a configuration, the rendering effect can be enhanced. In addition, it is possible to reduce (prevent) the sense of discomfort caused by the termination of the suggested effect when it is halfway.

(8) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (7) above,
Variable display means for performing variable display;
Correspondence display means (for example, effect control CPU 120 that performs hold display or active display) that performs correspondence display corresponding to variable display;
Correspondence display change means (for example, a notice that displays the correspondence display of the change target in a special display mode that is displayed only when the display mode of the correspondence display changes while changing the display mode of the correspondence display The effect control CPU 120 or the like, which changes the display mode of the hold display of the advance notice target so that it can be recognized which hold is the target variable display.
You may do so.

  According to such a configuration, the object to be changed becomes clear, and the rendering effect can be improved.

(9) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (8) above,
Variable display means for performing variable display;
Correspondence display means (for example, effect control CPU 120 that performs hold display or active display) that performs correspondence display corresponding to variable display;
Correspondence display changing means (as shown in FIGS. 26 (a), (b) and (c), the character 930 holds the color ball 931 by changing the display mode of the correspondence display by causing the action display (eg ball etc.) to act. Further, the color ball 931 collides with the hold display TH and changes the color of the hold display TH, etc.) when throwing toward the display TH.
The corresponding display changing means is
The first pattern (such as a success pattern in FIGS. 26 (a), (b) and (c)) that starts the display of the action display and changes the display mode of the correspondence display after a predetermined period has elapsed, and the display of the action display And a second pattern (such as a failure pattern in FIGS. 26 (a), (b), (d)) that does not change the display mode of the correspondence display after a predetermined period has elapsed.
After the display of the action display is started, it is possible to execute deceleration control to reduce the speed of the action display with respect to the corresponding display to be made at a common timing in a predetermined period of the first pattern and the second pattern. Certainly (eg, as shown in FIG. 26 (b), deceleration of the ball speed is started at the same timing at the success and failure times, etc.)
You may do so.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by changing the action display.

  Moreover, the invention which concerns on the following means A1-means A6 is included in the form for implementing invention mentioned later. Conventionally, in the gaming machine, the display area of the effect display device is controlled to the non-display state (dark state) as disclosed in JP 2008-259540 A, and then the effect display device is darkened. There is known a gaming machine in which a special light emission effect (specific effect) is performed in which display control of a predetermined light vortex image is performed in a display area. However, in such a gaming machine, there is a possibility that the effect of the specific effect can not be sufficiently enhanced when executing the specific effect. In view of this point, provision of a gaming machine capable of improving the effect of the specific effect is required.

(Means A1) A gaming machine according to another aspect is a gaming machine capable of playing a game, and a rendering device capable of executing rendering (for example, rendering combination 90201) and an operable movable body (for example, pushing) Specific effect executing means (for example, the effect control microcomputer 90100) capable of executing a specific effect (for example, a specific effect of the aspect shown in FIG. 63 (5)) in the vicinity of the movable body using the button 90120) and the effect device. A portion for executing step S908120) and movable body control means for operating the movable body (for example, a portion for executing step S908111 in the effect control microcomputer 90100), the movable body control means executes the specific effect When the movable body is movable (for example, the vibration of the push button 90120 shown in FIG. 63 (3) After, that perform particular effect shown in FIG. 63 (5)) that it is characterized. According to such a configuration, the rendering effect of the specific rendering can be improved.

(Means A2) In means A1, the specific effect execution means can execute the specific effect after the movable body is operated by the movable body control means (for example, in the vibration operation of the push button 90120 shown in FIG. 63 (3)) Later, the specific effect shown in FIG. 63 (5) may be executed. According to such a configuration, the specific effect can be focused on before the start of the specific effect.

(Means A3) In means A1 or A2, the movable body is an operation means (for example, push button 90120) operable by the player, and the movable body control means operates the operation means when the specific effect is performed. The vibration means (for example, after the vibration action of the push button 90120 shown in FIG. 63 (3), the specific effect shown in FIG. 63 (5) is performed), the operation means , And may be configured to include the driven member 90303) shown in FIGS. According to such a configuration, it is possible to guide the player's line of sight to a specific effect by sight and touch.

(Measure A4) In any of the means A1 to A3, the light emitter for effect (for example, frame LED 9028) and the display means are dimmed when specific effect is performed (for example, FIG. Means for causing the entire display screen of the effect display device 909 to be darkened (blacked out)) (for example, a portion for executing step S908108 in the effect control microcomputer 90100); The light emission control means for performing light emission control of the light emitter (for example, a portion for executing steps S908109 and S8123 in the effect control microcomputer 90100), the movable body control means turns off the light emitter for effect by the light emission control means In the closed state, the movable body can be operated (for example, as shown in FIG. 63 (3) With effect display device 909 is darkened display (blackout display), while the frame LED9028 is all turned off, vibrate operated pushbutton 90 120) may be configured so. According to such a configuration, it is possible to more effectively guide the player's gaze to a specific effect.

(Means A5) In any of means A1 to A4, the movable body control means includes at least a first operation mode (eg, vibration time 1 second) and a second operation mode (eg, vibration time 3 seconds). The movable body can be operated by a plurality of types of operation modes including (for example, as shown in FIG. 59, 1 second, 3 seconds and 5 seconds are provided as the vibration time of the push button 90120), The specific effect execution means differs in the specific effect execution mode depending on whether the movable body is operated in the first operation mode or the second operation mode (for example, as shown in FIG. 59). When the vibration operation of the push button 90120 with a vibration time of 1 second is performed, the specific effect A is performed, and when the vibration operation of the push button 90120 with a vibration time of 3 seconds is performed, the specific effect B with That are executed) it may be configured so. According to such a configuration, attention can also be given to the operation mode of the movable body.

(Means A6) In any one of means A1 to A5, display means (for example, effect display device 909) having a display area and a predetermined area (for example, an upper area) in which the player can not visually recognize the display area A predetermined display control means (for example, in the second other embodiment) capable of displaying a predetermined display (for example, a mini image) on 905B etc., notice is given in step S908003 of effect design variation start processing in microcomputer 90100 for effect control The process table corresponding to the effect is selected, and the process of step S908005 of the effect pattern change start process or the process during effect pattern fluctuation (step S90802) is executed according to the process table according to the advance effect to execute the advance effect. Visual guidance (for example) to guide the player's gaze to a predetermined area In the display area (for example, in the second other embodiment), in step S908003 of the effect design variation start process in the effect control microcomputer 90100 The process table corresponding to the notice effect is selected, and the notice effect is executed by executing the process of step S908005 of the effect symbol change start process and the process during effect pattern change (step S90802) according to the process table according to the notice effect Part) and may be configured to include the According to such a configuration, the interest of the game can be improved.

It is a front view of a pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the various control boards etc. which were mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a figure which shows an example of a production control command. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special symbol process processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of start winning a prize judging processing. It is a figure for demonstrating random value MR1-MR3. It is a block diagram showing an example of composition of a special figure reservation storage part. It is a flow chart which shows an example of judgment processing at the time of starting winning a prize. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special symbol normal processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a special figure display result determination table and a big hit classification determination table. It is a flow chart which shows an example of change pattern setting processing. It is an explanatory view showing an example of composition of a change pattern. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a big hit fluctuation pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a loss fluctuation pattern determination table. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of pre-reading processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of pre-reading production execution setting processing. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a pre-reading production execution determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a final color determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of an expansion aspect setting presence determination table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a variable display start setting process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production processing under variable display. It is a timing chart in a case where suspension / active change production and movable body production which perform expansion display are performed. It is a figure which shows the example of production operation of a movable body production. It is a figure which shows the production | presentation operation example of suspension / active change presentation and movable body presentation. It is a figure which shows the example of production | presentation operation | movement of suspension change production. It is the front view which saw the pachinko game machine from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view for demonstrating the internal structure of a push button. It is a disassembled perspective view for demonstrating the internal structure of a push button. It is a block diagram showing an example of circuit composition of a game control board (main board). It is a block diagram showing an example of circuit composition of a production control board, a lamp driver board, and an audio output board. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing which CPU in a main board | substrate performs. It is a flowchart which shows 4 ms timer interruption processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is explanatory drawing which shows a big hit determination table, a small hit determination table, and a big hit classification determination table. It is an explanatory view showing an example of contents of an effect control command. It is an explanatory view showing an example of contents of an effect control command. It is a flow chart which shows an example of a program of special symbol process processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of a program of special symbol process processing. It is a flow chart which shows starting opening switch passage processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a pending | holding storage buffer. It is a flow chart which shows special symbol normal processing. It is a flow chart which shows special symbol normal processing. It is a flow chart which shows change pattern setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows a display result designation | designated command transmission process. It is a flow chart which shows processing during special symbol change. It is a flow chart which shows special symbol stop processing. It is a flow chart which shows big hit end processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of a program of special symbol display control processing. It is a flowchart which shows production control main processing which CPU for production control performs. It is an explanatory view showing an example of composition of a command receiving buffer. It is a flow chart which shows command analysis processing. It is a flowchart which shows production control process processing. It is a flow chart which shows change pattern command reception waiting processing. It is a flowchart which shows production design fluctuation start processing. It is an explanatory view showing an example of a stop design of a production design. It is an explanatory view showing the example of composition of process data. It is a flow chart which shows specific production setting processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a specific presentation determination table. It is a flow chart which shows processing during production design variation. It is a flow chart which shows processing during production design variation. It is a flowchart which shows production design fluctuation stop processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production | presentation aspect of suggestion production and specific production. It is the figure which looked at the effect display apparatus and character (in dotted line) in 2nd other embodiment from the front. It is AA sectional drawing of FIG. 64 in 2nd other embodiment. It is a figure which shows the movement of mini-image AC in 2nd other embodiment. It is an example of a production | presentation screen of a notice production | presentation which announces the expectation degree of execution of the super reach in 2nd other embodiment. It is an example of a production | presentation screen of the notice production | presentation which announces the big hit expectation degree in 2nd other embodiment.

  Hereinafter, an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment, showing an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (game machine) 1 is roughly divided into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting a gaming board surface and a gaming machine frame (underframe) 3 for supporting and fixing the gaming board 2. In the game board 2, a substantially circular game area surrounded by guide rails is formed. In this game area, a game ball as a game medium is shot and shot from a predetermined ball striking device.

  A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided at predetermined positions of the game board 2 (the right side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1). Each of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B is constituted of, for example, LEDs (light emitting diodes) of 7 segments, dot matrix, etc., and identifies each in a special view game as an example of a variable display game. Special symbols (also referred to as "special figures"), which are plural types of possible identification information (special identification information), are variably displayed (variable display). For example, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B can variably display a plurality of types of special symbols composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9" and symbols indicating "-", etc. Do.

  In addition, the special symbols displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are limited to those composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9" and symbols indicating "-", etc. For example, a plurality of types of lighting patterns may be set in advance as a plurality of types of special symbols, in which combinations of what are turned on and turned off in the 7-segment LED are different. Hereinafter, the special symbol variably displayed in the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as "the first special view", and the special symbol variably displayed in the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as the "second special view" .

  An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is configured of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or the like, and forms a display area for displaying various effect images. On the screen of the image display device 5, corresponding to the variable display of the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A in the special figure game and the variable display of the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. For example, in the decorative symbol display area serving as a plurality of variable display portions such as three, decorative symbols which are plural types of identification information (decorative identification information) capable of identifying each are variably displayed. The variable display of this decorative pattern is also included in the variable display game.

  As an example, on the screen of the image display device 5, decorative symbol display areas of "left", "middle" and "right" are arranged. Then, in response to any one of the change of the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A and the change of the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B being started in the special figure game, In each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas, fluctuation of the decorative symbol (for example, scroll display in the vertical direction) is started. After that, when the finalized special symbol is stopped and displayed as the variable display result in the special view game, the decorative symbol is variable in each of the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative symbol display areas in the image display device 5 The finalized decorative symbol (final stop symbol) to be displayed is stopped and displayed. The finalized decorative design may be different from the decorative design displayed during the variable display. For example, a decorative pattern other than the decorative pattern to be scrolled may be a finalized decorative pattern.

  On the screen of the image display device 5, the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A or the special figure game in synchronization with the special pattern game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B Then, variable display of a plurality of kinds of decorative symbols that can be distinguished from each other is performed, and a finalized decorative symbol to be a variable display result is derived and displayed (or simply referred to as "derivation"). Note that, for example, deriving and displaying various display symbols such as a special symbol and a decorative symbol means to stop display (also referred to as complete stop display or final stop display) identification information such as a decorative symbol and to end variable display. . On the other hand, during the variable display from when variable display of the decorative symbol is started to when the fixed decorative symbol as the variable display result is derived and displayed, the change speed of the decorative symbol is "0", and the decorative symbol is displayed. For example, the symbol may be displayed in a stationary state, and may be in a display state that causes, for example, slight shaking or expansion and contraction. Such a display state is also referred to as a temporary stop display, and although the display result in the variable display is not displayed in a definite manner, the player can recognize that the variation of the decorative symbol by the scroll display or the update display is not progressing. It becomes. The temporary stop display may include, for example, complete stop display of the decorative pattern only for a time shorter than a predetermined time (for example, one second) without causing slight shaking or expansion or contraction.

  On the screen of the image display 5, a start winning storage display area 5H is disposed. In the start winning storage display area 5H, a holding display is performed to display the number of holdings of the variable display (the number of special drawing holding memories) corresponding to the special drawing game in a distinguishable manner. Here, when the variable display corresponding to the special view game is suspended, the game ball enters the first starting winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 6A or the second starting winning opening formed by the normal variable winning ball device 6B. It occurs on the basis of the start winning by (for example, passing). That is, although a start condition (also referred to as "execution condition") for executing a variable display game such as a special view game or variable display of a decorative symbol is satisfied, a variable display game based on the start condition established earlier is being executed. When the start condition for allowing the start of the variable display game is not satisfied due to the fact that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the big hit gaming state, etc., the hold of the variable display corresponding to the satisfied start condition is To be done. In this embodiment, the hold display is performed by displaying the same number of symbols (in the present embodiment, it is a circle or the like, and hereinafter also referred to as a hold display symbol) as the variable display being held. One hold display symbol corresponds to one variable display being held. The pending variable display corresponding to the special view game using the first special view is represented by the on-hold display symbol displayed in the area on the left side in the starting winning a prize storage display area 5H. The pending variable display corresponding to the special drawing game using the second special view is represented by the holding display symbol displayed in the area on the right side in the start winning storage display area 5H.

  For example, the start condition (first start condition) of the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied by the occurrence of the first start winning that the game ball enters the first start winning opening If the first start condition for starting the special view game using the first special drawing based on the establishment of the first start condition is not satisfied, the number of first special view reservation memories is incremented by 1 (increment) And the execution of the special drawing game using the first special drawing is suspended. In addition, the start condition (second start condition) of the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B is satisfied by the occurrence of the second start winning that the game ball enters the second start winning opening If the second start condition for starting the special view game using the second special view based on the establishment of the second start condition is not satisfied when the second start condition is satisfied, the number of second special view reservation storages is incremented by 1 (increment And the execution of the special drawing game using the second special drawing is suspended. On the other hand, when the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is started, the first special figure reservation memory number is decremented by 1 and the special figure game is executed using the second special figure Is decremented by one.

  The number of pending storages of the variable display obtained by adding the number of the first special view pending storage and the number of the second special view pending storage is particularly referred to as the total pending storage number. The term "number of Tokushu reserve storages" simply refers to a concept that includes all of the number of first to reserve special storages, the number of second to reserve special storages, and the total number of pending storages, but in particular It may refer to a concept including the number of first special view pending storages and the number of second special view pending storages, but excluding the total number of pending storages.

  Along with or in place of the start winning storage display area 5H, a display may be provided to display the number of stored special figures. In the example shown in FIG. 1, together with the start winning combination storage display area 5H, a first hold for specifying the number of special view hold storages to be identifiable on the upper part of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B. A display 25A and a second hold display 25B are provided. The first hold indicator 25A displays the number of first special view hold memories in an identifiable manner. The second hold indicator 25B displays the second special view hold storage number in a distinguishable manner. The first hold indicator 25A and the second hold indicator 25B are, for example, the number corresponding to the upper limit (for example, "4") in each of the first special view reserve storage number and the second special view reserve storage number (for example, 4 Components) are configured. Here, the first special view reserve storage number and the second special view reserve storage number are displayed according to the number of lighted LEDs.

  On the screen of the image display device 5, an active display area 5HA is disposed in proximity to the start winning storage display area 5H. In the active display area 5HA, display corresponding to the variable display in progress is performed. The display in the active display area 5HA is referred to as active display (also referred to as variable display correspondence display, digest display or current display). In active display area 5HA, for example, in response to the start of the special view game using the first special figure when the first start condition is satisfied, the first (first) erased (digested) in start prize storing display area 5H Active display is performed according to the hold display. Further, in the active display area 5HA, for example, the second hold storage unit 5HL is erased (digested) in response to the start of the special view game using the second special view when the second start condition is satisfied. Active display corresponding to the second hold display is performed.

  A movable body 99 is provided at a predetermined position (here, the lower center side) in the display area of the image display device 5. The movable body 99 is rotationally driven by the rotational drive of the movable body motor 61 shown in FIG.

  Below the image display device 5, a normal winning ball device 6A is provided, and on the right of the normal winning ball device 6A, a normal variable winning ball device 6B is provided. The regular winning ball device 6A, for example, forms a first starting winning opening as a starting area (first starting area) which is always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. The normally variable winning ball device 6B has an electric tulip type role having a pair of movable wing pieces that changes between a closed state in which the vertical position is achieved by the solenoid 81 for the ordinary electric character shown in FIG. (Normal motorized role) is provided to form a second start winning opening.

  As an example, in the case of the normally variable winning ball device 6B, the movable wing piece is in the vertical position when the solenoid 81 for the ordinary electric character is in the off state, so the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening Make it On the other hand, in the case of the normally variable winning ball device 6B, the movable wing piece is in the tilting position when the solenoid 81 for the ordinary electric character is in the on state, whereby the game ball can enter the second starting winning opening. Put in a state. The normally variable winning ball device 6B is normally open when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, and the game ball can enter the second start winning port while the enlarged opening state is in the state when the solenoid 81 is on. Also, the game ball may be configured to be difficult to enter. As described above, the normally variable winning ball device 6B is in the first variable state such as the opening state where the gaming ball can enter or the opening state where the game ball can enter, and the closing state where the gaming ball can not enter or entry difficulty It is configured to be changeable to a second variable state such as a normally open state. The first variable state may be a state in which the gaming ball is more likely to enter the second start winning opening than the second variable state.

  The game ball entering the first starting winning opening formed in the normal winning ball device 6A is detected by, for example, a first starting opening switch 22A shown in FIG. The game ball entering the second starting winning opening formed on the normally variable winning ball device 6B is detected by, for example, a second starting opening switch 22B shown in FIG. A predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls (prize game media) based on the detection of the game balls by the first starting opening switch 22A, and the first special view reserve memory number is a predetermined number. If the upper limit value (for example, "4") or less, the first start condition is satisfied. A predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball based on the fact that the game ball is detected by the second start opening switch 22B, and the second special view reserve memory number is less than or equal to a predetermined upper limit For example, the second start condition is satisfied.

  The number of winning balls to be paid out based on the detection of the gaming ball by the first starting opening switch 22A and the number of the winning balls to be paid out based on the detection of the gaming ball by the second starting opening switch 22B. The numbers may be the same or different from each other. The pachinko gaming machine 1 may directly pay out the gaming balls to be the winning balls, or may give a score corresponding to the number of gaming balls to be the winning balls.

  Below the regular winning ball device 6A, a special variable winning ball device 7 is provided. The special variable winning prize ball device 7 includes a special winning opening door which is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 serving as a special winning opening door shown in FIG. 2 and a specific area which changes to an open state and a closed state by the special winning opening door. To form a winning opening as.

  As an example, in the special variable winning prize ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning mouth door is off, the big winning mouth door closes the big winning mouth, and the game ball enters the big winning mouth (for example, Do not pass. On the other hand, in the special variable winning prize ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning mouth door is in the on state, the big winning mouth door opens the big winning mouth, and the game ball easily enters the big winning mouth Become. As described above, the special winning opening as the specific area changes into an open state advantageous for the player to easily enter the game ball, and a closed state disadvantageously for the player because the game ball can not enter. In place of the closed state in which the game ball can not enter the big winning opening, or in addition to the closed state, a partially open state in which the game ball does not easily enter the big prize opening may be provided.

  The game ball having entered the special winning opening is detected by, for example, the count switch 23 shown in FIG. A predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as winning balls based on the detection of the game balls by the count switch 23. Thus, when the game ball enters the large winning opening that is in the open state in the special variable winning ball device 7, for example, when the game ball enters the other winning opening such as the first start winning opening and the second start winning opening More prize balls are paid out. Therefore, when the special winning prize opening is opened in the special variable winning prize ball device 7, the gaming ball can enter the special winning prize opening, which is an advantageous first state for the player. On the other hand, if the special winning hole is closed in the special variable winning ball device 7, it becomes impossible or difficult to get the winning ball by entering the gaming ball into the big winning hole, which is disadvantageous for the player. It becomes 2 states.

  An ordinary symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, on the left side of the game area). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is composed of LEDs of 7 segments or dot matrix as in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, for example, plural types different from the special symbol An ordinary symbol (also referred to as "common figure" or "ordinary figure") that is identification information is variably displayed (variable display). Such variable display of ordinary symbols is referred to as a common-play game (also referred to as a "normal-figure game"). Above the normal symbol display 20, a general drawing reserve display 25C is provided. The general drawing retention indicator 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the general drawing retention memory number as the number of effective passing balls passed through the passing gate 41.

  On the surface of the game board 2, besides the above-described configuration, a windmill and a large number of obstacle nails for changing the flow direction and speed of the game ball are provided. In addition, as a winning opening different from the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening and the large winning opening, for example, a single or a plurality of general winning openings which are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member are provided. It may be done. In this case, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls may be paid out as winning balls based on the fact that a game ball entering one of the general winning openings is detected by a predetermined general winning ball switch. At the lowermost position of the game area, an out port is provided where game balls that have not entered any winning port are captured.

  At the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3, speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided, and further, a gaming effect lamp 9 is provided at the periphery of the gaming area. A decorative LED may be arranged around each structure (for example, the normal winning ball device 6A, the normal variable winning ball device 6B, the special variable winning ball device 7 and the like) in the game area of the pachinko gaming machine 1. At the lower right portion of the gaming machine frame 3 is provided a striking operation handle (operation knob) operated by a player or the like to fire a gaming ball as a gaming medium toward the gaming area. For example, the hit ball operating handle adjusts the resilience of the gaming ball according to the amount of operation (the amount of rotation) by the player or the like.

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a game ball paid out as a prize ball and a game ball lent out by a predetermined ball lending machine are held so as to be able to be supplied to the ball striking device (stored ) Is provided. At the lower part of the gaming machine frame 3, a lower tray is provided which holds (retains) surplus balls and the like overflowing from the upper tray so as to be discharged to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  A stick controller 31A which can be held and tilted by the player is attached to a member forming the lower tray, for example, at a predetermined position on the upper surface of the lower tray main body (for example, the central portion of the lower tray). There is. The stick controller 31A includes an operating rod held by the player, and a trigger button is provided at a predetermined position of the operating rod (for example, a position where the index finger of the operating hand is hit when the player holds the operating rod). There is. The trigger button can perform a predetermined instruction operation by pushing and pulling with a predetermined operation finger (for example, index finger or the like) while the player holds the operation stick of the stick controller 31A with the operation hand (for example, left hand or the like) It should just be comprised. Inside the operating rod, a trigger sensor may be incorporated so as to detect a predetermined instruction operation such as a push-pull operation on the trigger button.

  A controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2) including a tilt direction sensor unit for detecting a tilting operation on the operating rod may be provided in the lower main body inside the lower portion of the stick controller 31A or the like. For example, the tilt direction sensor unit may be two transmissive photosensors (parallel sensors) disposed parallel to the board of the game board 2 on the left side of the center position of the operating rod as viewed from the player facing the pachinko game machine 1 Four transmission types combining the pair) and two transmission type photosensors (vertical sensor pairs) arranged vertically to the board surface of the game board 2 on the right side of the center position of the operation stick viewed from the player's side It may be configured to include a photo sensor.

  The member forming the upper tray is, for example, a push button 31B (in which a player can perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the upper tray main body (for example, above the stick controller 31A)). See FIG. 2). The push button 31B may be configured to be able to mechanically, electrically or electromagnetically detect a predetermined instruction operation by the player or the like. A push sensor 35B may be provided inside the main body of the upper tray or the like at the installation position of the push button 31B, for detecting a player's operation performed on the push button 31B.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 is mounted with various control boards such as a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a voice control board 13 and a lamp control board 14 as shown in FIG. The pachinko gaming machine 1 also includes a relay board 15 for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main board 11 and the effect control board 12. Besides, various substrates such as a payout control substrate, an information terminal substrate, a launch control substrate, an interface substrate, a touch sensor substrate, etc. are disposed on the back of the gaming board etc. in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and various circuits for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are mounted. The main substrate 11 is mainly directed to a sub-side control substrate consisting of a setting function of random numbers used in the special view game, a function of inputting a signal from a switch disposed at a predetermined position, etc. And a function of outputting and transmitting a control command as an example of command information as a control signal, and a function of outputting various information to a hall management computer. Further, the main board 11 performs lighting / extinguishing control of each LED (for example, segment LED) constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the first special figure or the second special figure The variable display of a predetermined display pattern, such as controlling the variable display of the normal symbol display 20 or performing the on / off / coloring control of the normal symbol display 20 to control the variable display of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display 20 It also has a function to control.

  On the main board 11, for example, a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like are mounted. The switch circuit 110 takes in detection signals (detection signals indicating that passage or entry of game media has been detected) from various switches for game ball detection, and transmits the signals to the microcomputer 100 for game control. The solenoid circuit 111 generates a solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 (for example, a signal for driving each solenoid such as a signal for turning on or off the solenoid 81 or the solenoid 82) for the ordinary electric role And the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door.

  The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15, and receives the image display device 5, the speakers 8L, 8R. And, various circuits for controlling the rendering operation by the electric component for presentation such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED are mounted. That is, the effect control board 12 performs all or part of the display operation in the image display device 5, all or part of the audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, all or one of the lighting / extinguishing operations in the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED. It has a function of controlling the control content for causing the electric component for effect such as a part to execute a predetermined effect operation and controlling the determined control content.

  The voice control board 13 is a control board for voice output control provided separately from the effect control board 12 and causes the speakers 8L and 8R to output voice based on commands and control data from the effect control board 12 and the like. The processing circuit etc. which perform the audio | voice signal processing for this are mounted. The lamp control board 14 is a control board for lamp output control provided separately from the effect control board 12, and based on commands and control data from the effect control board 12, the game effect lamp 9, decorative LED, etc. The lamp driver circuit etc. which perform lighting / extinguishing drive in are mounted.

  As shown in FIG. 2, detection signals from various switches such as the gate switch 21, the start port switch (the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B), and the count switch 23 are transmitted to the main substrate 11. Wiring is connected. The various switches may be of any type that can detect a game ball as a game medium, such as a sensor called, for example. Further, the main substrate 11 is connected with a wire for transmitting a command signal for performing display control of the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, the normal symbol display device 20 and the like.

  The control signal transmitted from the main substrate 11 to the effect control substrate 12 is relayed by the relay substrate 15. The control command transmitted from the main substrate 11 to the effect control substrate 12 via the relay substrate 15 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. In the effect control command, for example, a display control command used to control an image display operation in the image display device 5, a voice control command used to control an audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R, a game effect lamp 9 A lamp control command used to control the lighting operation of the decorative LED or the like may be included.

  FIG. 3 is a view showing an example of the effect control command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 100. As shown in FIG. The command 80XX (H) is a production control command (variation pattern command) for specifying a variation pattern of the production design that is variably displayed on the image display device 5 corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol (each corresponding to the variation pattern XX ). That is, when a unique number is assigned to each of the variation patterns that can be used, which will be described later, there is a variation command corresponding to each of the variation patterns specified by the number. "(H)" indicates that it is a hexadecimal number. Further, the effect control command for specifying the fluctuation pattern is also a command for specifying the start of fluctuation. Therefore, when the command 80XX (H) is received, the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to start variable display of the effect pattern.

  The command 8A01 (H) is an effect control command (first start winning opening designation command) for notifying that the game ball has entered the first start winning opening. The command 8A02 (H) is an effect control command (second start winning opening designating command) for notifying that effect when the game ball enters the second starting winning opening.

  The commands 8C01 (H) to 8C03 (H) are effect control commands indicating the contents of the determination result at the time of winning, and are effect control commands indicating whether or not to make a big hit as the determination result at the time of winning, . Since the effect control CPU 120 determines the display result of the effect pattern in response to the reception of the commands 8C01 (H) to 8C03 (H), the commands 8C01 (H) to 8C03 (H) are referred to as display result specification commands. The command 8C01 (H) (display result 1 designation command) designates a loss. The command 8C02 (H) (display result 2 designation command) designates 15R big hit and definite variation. The command 8C03 (H) (display result 3 designation command) designates 15R big hit and non-probability change.

  The command 8D01 (H) is an effect control command (first symbol variation start designation command) indicating that variable display (variation) of the first special symbol is started. The command 8D02 (H) is an effect control command (second symbol variation start designation command) indicating that variable display (variation) of the second special symbol is to be started. The first symbol variation start specification command and the second symbol variation start specification command may be generically referred to as a special symbol specification command (or a symbol variation start specification command).

  The command 8F00 (H) is an effect control command (design confirmation designation command) indicating that variable display (variation) of the effect symbol is ended and the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. Upon receiving the symbol determination designation command, the effect control CPU 120 ends the variable display (variation display) of the effect design and derives and displays the display result.

  A command 9000 (H) is an effect control command (initialization designation command: power on designation command) transmitted when power supply to the gaming machine is started (initial setting). The command 9200 (H) is an effect control command (power failure recovery designation command) transmitted when power supply to the gaming machine is resumed (initial setting at restart). When power supply to the gaming machine is started, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a power failure recovery designation command if data is stored in the backup RAM, and otherwise initialization designation Send a command The command 9F00 (H) is an effect control command (customer waiting demo specification command) for specifying a customer waiting demonstration.

  The command A 001 (H) is an effect control command (big hit start designation command: fan fare designation command) for specifying the start of the fanfare (start of the big hit gaming state) in the case of the 15 round big hit.

  In the jackpot gaming state, the fanfare is executed first, and then the jackpot gaming which is the main of the jackpot gaming state in which the opening of the special variable winning ball device 7 or the like (round game) is performed is executed. The ending is executed after the game. Fanfare is an indication or notification that the big hit gaming state has been started, that is, the big hit game is about to be started. The ending is an effect to notify that the big hit gaming state is ended, that is, the big hit game is finished.

  The command A2XX (H) is an effect control command (a special winning opening open designation command) for designating the release of the special variable winning prize ball device 7 of the number (round) indicated by XX. A3XX (H) is an effect control command (designation command after opening the special winning opening) for designating closing of the special variable winning prize ball device 7 for the number (round) indicated by XX.

  The command A 601 (H) is an effect control command (big hit end designation command: ending designation command) for specifying start of ending.

  The command B 000 (H) is an effect control command (normal state designation command) for designating that the gaming state is the normal state (normal gaming state). The command B 001 (H) is an effect control command (time saving state specifying command) for specifying that the gaming state is the time saving (favorable) state. The command B1XX (H) is an effect control command (time reduction number specification command) for specifying the remaining number of time reduction (advantage) states (how many times the time reduction state continues until the variable display ends). “XX” in the command B1XX (H) indicates the remaining number of time saving (favorable) states.

  The command C0XX (H) is an effect control command (total pending storage number specifying command) for specifying the total pending storage number obtained by adding the first special view pending storage number and the second special view pending storage number. “XX” in the command C0XX (H) indicates the total number of pending storages. The command C1XX (H) is an effect control command (first pending storage number designation command) for specifying the first special view pending storage number. “XX” in the command C1XX (H) indicates the number of first special view reserved storages. The command C2XX (H) is an effect control command (second pending storage number designation command) for specifying the second special view pending storage number. “XX” in the command C2XX (H) indicates the second special view reserved storage number.

  Command C6XXH is an effect control command indicating the contents of the determination result at the time of winning, and as the determination result at the time of winning, a determination result as to which range of the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern type falls (variation pattern type (Results of determination) (corresponding to the variation pattern XX). That is, as with the variation pattern command, when a unique number is assigned to each of the variation patterns that can be used, which will be described later, there is a command corresponding to each of the variation patterns specified by the number.

  The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main substrate 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101 for storing a program for game control, fixed data, etc., and a work for game control. A RAM (Random Access Memory) 102 for providing an area, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103 for executing a control operation by executing a game control program, and updating of numerical data representing a random number independently of the CPU 103 A random number circuit 104 to be performed and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105 are provided.

  As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes a program read from the ROM 101 to execute a process for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. At this time, a fixed data read operation in which the CPU 103 reads fixed data from the ROM 101, a variable data write operation in which the CPU 103 writes various fluctuation data to the RAM 102 and temporarily stores it, and various fluctuation data temporarily stored in the RAM 102 by the CPU 103 Data reading operation to read out the data, reception operation in which the CPU 103 receives input of various signals from the outside of the gaming control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105, to the outside of the gaming control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105 Also, a transmission operation for outputting various signals is performed.

  The one-chip microcomputer constituting the game control microcomputer 100 may be at least incorporated with the RAM 102 in addition to the CPU 103, and the ROM 101, the random number circuit 104, the I / O 105, etc. may be externally attached.

  In the gaming control microcomputer 100, numerical data indicating various random number values used to control the progression of the game is countable, for example, by the random number circuit 104 or the like. The random numbers used to control the progress of the game are also called game random numbers. The gaming random number may be updated by hardware such as the random number circuit 104 or may be updated by software when the CPU 103 of the gaming control microcomputer 100 executes a predetermined computer program. May be For example, a random counter provided in a predetermined area (such as a game control counter setting unit) of the RAM 102 in the game control microcomputer 100 or a random counter provided in an internal register separate from the RAM 102 indicates a predetermined random number. The random number value may be updated by storing numerical data and updating the stored value periodically or irregularly by the CPU 103.

  The ROM 101 of the microcomputer 100 for game control stores various selection data, table data, and the like used to control the progress of the game, in addition to the program for game control. For example, the ROM 101 stores data constituting a plurality of determination tables, determination tables, setting tables, and the like prepared for the CPU 103 to make various determinations, determinations, and settings. The ROM 101 also includes table data constituting a plurality of command transmission tables used by the CPU 103 to transmit control signals serving as various control commands from the main board 11 and a variation pattern table storing a plurality of variation patterns. Table data to be configured is stored. Various data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is temporarily stored in the RAM 102 included in the game control microcomputer 100 in a rewritable manner.

  The effect control board 12 includes an effect control CPU 120 that performs control operations according to a program, a ROM 121 that stores effect control programs, fixed data, and the like, a RAM 122 that provides a work area for the effect control CPU 120, and an image display device 5, a random number circuit 124 for executing processing for determining control contents of the display operation in 5, and the like, the random number circuit 124 for updating numerical data indicating random numbers independently of the effect control CPU 120, and I / O 125 And is mounted.

  As an example, the effect control board 12 executes a program for effect control read out from the ROM 121 by the effect control CPU 120 to execute a process of controlling the effect operation by the effect electric component. At this time, a fixed data read operation in which the effect control CPU 120 reads out fixed data from the ROM 121, a change data write operation in which the effect control CPU 120 writes various change data in the RAM 122 and temporarily stores them, and the effect control CPU 120 in the RAM 122 Fluctuation data reading operation to read out various fluctuation data temporarily stored, reception operation to which CPU 120 for production control receives input of various signals from outside of production control board 12, CPU 120 for production control goes to outside of production control board 12 A transmission operation for outputting various signals is also performed.

  The effect control CPU 120, the ROM 121, and the RAM 122 may be included in a one-chip effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board 12. The effect control board 12 includes a wire for transmitting image data to the image display device 5 and a wire for transmitting a sound effect signal as an information signal indicating sound number data to the sound control board 13. Wiring or the like for transmitting an electric decoration signal as an information signal indicating lamp data to the lamp control board 14 is connected. Furthermore, in the effect control board 12, wiring for transmitting from the controller sensor unit 35A an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation on the stick controller 31A has been detected, and a game for the push button 31B. Wiring for transmitting an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that a person's operation action has been detected from the push sensor 35B is also connected. Furthermore, the effect control board 12 is also connected with a wire for transmitting a predetermined drive command signal to the motor drive circuit 16 for driving the movable body motor 61 that causes the movable effect body 99 to rotate. .

  In the effect control board 12, for example, numerical data indicating various random number values used to control the effect operation is counted by the random number circuit 124 or the like in an updatable manner. The random number used to control such a rendering operation is also referred to as a rendering random number.

  The ROM 121 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 2 stores various data tables and the like used to control the rendering operation, in addition to the program for effect control. For example, in the ROM 121, a plurality of determination tables prepared to make various determinations, determinations, and settings by the effect control CPU 120, table data forming the determination tables, pattern data forming the various effect control patterns, etc. It is memorized. The effect control pattern is, for example, process data including effect control execution data (display control data, voice control data, lamp control data, operation detection control data, etc.) associated with the effect control process timer determination value, an end code, etc. It is configured. The RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12 stores various data used to control the effect operation.

  The effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12 generates various commands. For example, the effect control CPU 120 determines the content to be displayed by the image display device 5 and outputs a display control instruction to the display control unit 123 according to the determination. The display control unit 123 mounted on the effect control board 12 determines the control content of the display operation in the image display device 5 based on the display control instruction from the effect control CPU 120, and generates the image data. For example, the display control unit 123 performs control to execute variable display of decorative symbols and various effect displays by determining the switching timing of the effect image to be displayed in the display screen of the image display device 5 or the like. As an example, in the display control unit 123, a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), an LCD driving circuit, and the like may be mounted. The VDP may be a graphics processing unit (GPU), a graphics controller LSI (GCL), or a microprocessor for image processing which is more generally referred to as a digital signal processor (DSP). The CGROM may be, for example, a non-rewritable semiconductor memory, a rewritable semiconductor memory such as a flash memory, or any of non-volatile recording media such as a magnetic memory and an optical memory. It may be configured.

  The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 has, for example, an input port for taking in the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11 and the like, and an output port for transmitting various signals to the outside of the effect control board 12 And including. For example, a video signal transmitted to the image display device 5, an instruction (sound effect signal) transmitted to the audio control board 13, and an instruction transmitted to the lamp control board 14 from the output port of the I / O 125 (Electrical decoration signal), a command (drive control signal) transmitted to the motor drive circuit 16 and the like are output.

  With the above configuration, the effect control CPU 120 causes the display control unit 123 to display the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 controls the speakers 8L and 8R via the voice control board 13 to output voice, and turns on / off the game effect lamp 9 or the decorative LED via the lamp control board 14 The effect image is displayed on the display area of the image display device 5 via the display control unit 123, or the movable body motor 61 is moved via the motor drive circuit 16 to move the movable body 99. In this manner, various effects (described below, such as reach effects, effects of movable effect members, and message effects such as the image display device 5 displaying an image of a message for the player, effects for exciting the game, etc.) are executed. .

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a predetermined game using a game ball as a game medium is performed, and a predetermined game value can be provided based on the game result. As an example of a game using a game ball, a predetermined hitting ball is launched based on the player having performed a predetermined operation (for example, a rotation operation) the hitting operation handle installed at the lower right of the front of the case in pachinko gaming machine 1 A game ball as a game medium is shot toward the game area by a shooting motor or the like included in the device. When the gaming ball flowing down the gaming area enters the first starting winning opening (first starting area) formed in the normal winning ball device 6A, the gaming ball is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A shown in FIG. 2 Thus, the first start condition is satisfied. Thereafter, based on the establishment of the first start condition, for example, due to the end of the previous special figure game or the big hit gaming state, the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A starts Be done.

  Also, when the game ball enters the second start winning opening (second start area) formed in the normally variable winning ball device 6B, the game ball is detected by the second start port switch 22B shown in FIG. The second start condition is satisfied. Thereafter, based on the establishment of the second start condition, for example, due to the end of the previous special drawing game or the big hit gaming state, the special drawing game using the second special drawing by the second special symbol display device 4B is started Be done. However, when the normally variable winning ball device 6B is in the normally open state or the closed state as the second variable state, it is difficult or impossible for the gaming ball to enter the second start winning opening.

  Based on the fact that the game ball having passed through the passage gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21 shown in FIG. 2, a common drawing start condition for executing variable display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 20 is satisfied. Thereafter, based on the fact that the common drawing start condition for starting the variable display of the normal symbol is established, for example, that the previous common drawing game has ended, the common drawing game by the normal symbol display 20 is started. In this common-play game, after starting the fluctuation of the normal symbol, when a predetermined time passes, the determined normal symbol as the variable display result of the normal symbol is stopped and displayed (derived display). At this time, if a specific normal symbol (common symbol per symbol) is stopped and displayed as the determined normal symbol, the variable display result of the normal symbol is "per common symbol". On the other hand, if the normal symbol other than the symbol in the common drawing is stopped and displayed as the determined normal symbol, the variable display result of the normal symbol becomes "general drawing lost". In response to the variable display result of the normal symbol becoming "per common figure", the open control and the enlargement open control are performed such that the movable wing piece of the electric tulip constituting the normal variable winning ball device 6B is tilted. The closing control or the normal opening control is performed to return to the vertical position when the predetermined time has elapsed. Whether or not to make the variable display result of the normal symbol "per common drawing" as the predetermined specific display result is the variable display result when the common pattern game by the normal symbol display 20 is started, etc. It is decided (predetermined) before deriving and displaying.

  When the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A is started, or when the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B is started It is determined (predetermined) before the variable display result is derived and displayed, whether or not the variable display result of the symbol is to be a "big hit" as a predetermined specific display result. Then, the variation pattern is determined at a predetermined ratio based on the determination of the variable display result, and the effect control command for designating the variable display result or the variation pattern is the microcomputer 100 for gaming control of the main substrate 11 shown in FIG. From the stage to the effect control board 12.

  After the special view game is started based on the determination of the variable display result and the variation pattern, for example, when a predetermined variable display time corresponding to the variation pattern has passed, a finalized special symbol to be a variable display result is derived. Is displayed. "Left", "Medium" and "Right" decorations arranged on the screen of the image display 5 corresponding to the variable display of the special symbols by the first special symbol display 4A and the second special symbol display 4B In the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, variable display of a decorative symbol (effect symbol) different from the special symbol is performed. In the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A, or in the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B, the finalized special display result of the special symbol When the symbol is derived and displayed, a finalized ornamental symbol as a variable display result of the decorative symbol is derived and displayed in the image display device 5.

  When the jackpot symbol predetermined as the variable display result of the special symbol is derived and displayed, the variable display result (special drawing display result) becomes a "big hit" (specific display result), and an advantageous value is given to the player It is controlled to the big hit game state as a specific game state. That is, whether or not the jackpot gaming state is controlled corresponds to whether or not the variable display result is a "big hit", and is determined (predetermined) before the variable display result is derived and displayed. As the variable display result of the special symbol, the big hit symbol is not derived and displayed, and when the lost symbol is derived and displayed, the variable display result (special figure display result) becomes "loss".

  As an example, a special symbol indicating the numbers “3”, “5”, and “7” is a big hit symbol, and a special symbol indicating a symbol “-” is a lost symbol. Each symbol such as a big hit symbol or lost symbol in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A may be a special symbol different from each symbol in the special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B. Also, the special symbol common to both of the special figure games may be a big hit symbol or a lost symbol.

  In the big hit game state, the big winning opening is opened and the special variable winning ball device 7 is in the first state advantageous to the player. Then, continue the large winning opening in a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 0.1 second) or in a period until a predetermined number (for example, nine) of game balls enter the large winning opening and a winning ball is generated. A round game (also referred to simply as a "round") to be released is executed. In a period other than the execution period of such a round game, the special winning opening is closed, making it difficult or impossible to generate winning balls. When the gaming ball enters the big winning opening, the winning switch is detected by the count switch 23, and a predetermined number (for example, 14) of gaming balls are paid out as a winning ball each time the detection is made. The round game in the jackpot gaming state is repeatedly executed until the predetermined upper limit number (for example, "15") is reached.

  When the special figure display result is "big hit", the case where the big hit type becomes either "non-probability change" or "probability change" is included. For example, when the jackpot symbol indicating the numbers "3" and "5" is derived and displayed as the variable display result of the special symbol, the jackpot type becomes "non-probability change" and the jackpot symbol indicating the number "7" is derived and displayed When it is done, the jackpot type becomes "probable". When the jackpot type is "non-probability" or "probability", the special variable winning ball device 7 is set as the first state advantageous to the player (opening the big winning opening) as a round game in the jackpot gaming state. A normal open round is performed in which the upper limit time is relatively long (for example, 29 seconds). The jackpot gaming state in which the normal opening round is executed is also referred to as a normal opening jackpot state or a first specific gaming state.

  When the special figure display result is "big hit", the case where the big hit type becomes either "non-probability change" or "probability change" is included. For example, when the jackpot symbol indicating the number "3" is derived and displayed as the variable symbol result of the special symbol, the jackpot type becomes "non-probability change" and the jackpot symbol indicating the number "7" is jackpotted when the jackpot is displayed The type is "probable". When the jackpot type is "non-probability" or "probability", the special variable winning ball device 7 is set as the first state advantageous to the player (opening the big winning opening) as a round game in the jackpot gaming state. A normal open round is performed in which the upper limit time is relatively long (for example, 29 seconds).

  After the jackpot gaming state ends, the probability that the variable display result will be the "big hit" (big hit probability) is controlled to the positive change state higher than the normal state based on the establishment of the predetermined probability change control condition There is. The definite change state is controlled to continue until a predetermined definite change termination condition is satisfied, such as the next big hit gaming state being started. Also, after the big hit gaming state ends, the average variable display time may be controlled to a short time state where it is shorter than the normal state. The short time state has a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state, and for example, the average variable display time is different. The time saving state is controlled so as to continue until one of the time saving end conditions is first established among the fact that the variable display of the predetermined number of times has been executed and that the next big hit gaming state is started. . The definite change state is controlled so as to be continued until one of the fixed change termination conditions of the other is established first among the variable display of a predetermined number of times and the start of the next big hit gaming state It may be done.

  As an example, when the jackpot type is "non-deterministic", after the jackpot gaming state ends, the gaming state becomes a time saving state. On the other hand, when the jackpot type is "probable change" and the big hit gaming state ends, the gaming state becomes a time saving state and a probability changing state.

  In the time saving state, the game ball can enter the second starting winning opening more easily than in the normal state, and the normally variable winning ball device 6B is in the first variable state (open state or enlarged open state) and the second variable state Change to the closed state or the normally open state). For example, control to shorten the variation time of the normal symbol (general figure variation time) in the regular game by the regular symbol display 20 than in the normal state or the variable display result of the regular symbol in each regular game Control to improve the probability of being “per-figure” than in normal condition, tilt control time to perform tilting control of movable wing in ordinary variable winning ball device 6B based on the variable display result becoming “per-flat” Is changed to the first variable state and the second variable state in the advantageous change mode by the control to make the length of the ball longer than that in the normal state, and the control to increase the number of tilting times more than in the normal state. Just do it. Note that any one of these controls may be performed, or a plurality of controls may be combined and performed. As described above, control for changing the normal variable winning prize ball device 6B between the first variable state and the second variable state in the advantageous change mode is referred to as high open control (also referred to as "time-saving control" or "high base control"). Be done. By being controlled to such a short time state, the time required for the next variable display result to be a "big hit" is shortened, and a special gaming state which is more advantageous to the player than the normal state is attained.

  It should be noted that the high open control is performed when the short state is said to be "high base state", "high base", etc., and the non-time-saving state is also called "low base state", "low base". The certainty state in which the certainty change control is performed is said to be “high certainty state”, “high certainty” and the like, and the gaming state not definite change state is also considered as “low certainty state” and “low certainty”. The gaming state when in a definite variation state and a short time state is also referred to as a "high probability high base state", "high probability high base", and the like. The game state when the time change state is not a definite change state is also referred to as "low probability high base state", "low probability high base", and the like. The game state when it is in a definite change state without being in a short time state is also referred to as "high probability low base state", "high probability low base", and the like. The normal state which does not become either the short time state or the definite state is also referred to as "low probability low base state", "low probability low base" and the like.

  The game ball used as a game medium in pachinko gaming machine 1 and the record information of the score given corresponding to the number thereof have a valuable value which can be exchanged for a special prize or a general prize according to the quantity, for example Just do it. Alternatively, the recorded information of the gaming balls and the scores may not be exchanged for special prizes or general prizes, but may have a valuable value that can be used for playing the game again with the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  In addition, the game value that can be awarded in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not limited to the payout of the game ball serving as a winning ball or the provision of a score, and for example, control to a big hit gaming state or special gaming state such as a probability change state To control, to be the first round number (for example "15") that the upper limit number of round games that can be executed in the big hit gaming state is more than the second round number (for example "7"), execute in time saving state The upper limit number of possible variable display becomes the first number (for example, "100") that is larger than the second number (for example, "50"), and the big hit probability in the positive change state is higher than the second probability (for example, 1/50) The high first probability (for example, 1/20), the number of times of continuous chanting which is the number of times of being repeatedly controlled to the big hit gaming state without being controlled to the normal state is more than the second consecutive chan number (for example, "5") Many Such part or all of it to be the first communication Chang number (e.g. "10"), it may include be a more favorable game situation for the player. It should be noted that the degree of advantage for the player is, for example, a state that is actually advantageous to the player when a certain event occurs (a state in which a privilege is provided or is provided, a state in which the percentage of awarding is high) , A benefit state, etc.) or a proportion that is in an advantageous state. Also, the special feature may indicate that the possibility of giving is high, may be the same as the target of the player's advantage (the advantageous state), but different from the object of the player's advantage It may be one.

  In "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R provided in image display device 5, a special figure game using the first special figure in first special symbol display device 4A Among the special drawing games using the second special drawing in the second special symbol display device 4B, variable display of the decorative design is started in response to the start of one of the special drawing games. Then, a period from when variable display of the decorative symbol is started to when variable display is ended by stop display of the decorative symbol in each of the left, middle, and right decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R. In the (during variable display period), the variable display mode of the decorative symbol may be a predetermined reach mode.

  Here, with the reach mode, a decorative symbol ("reach variation symbol") which is not displayed when the decorative symbol stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitutes a part of the big hit combination The term “display mode” also refers to a display mode in which the fluctuation continues, or a display mode in which all or part of the decorative patterns are synchronously fluctuated while constituting all or part of the jackpot combination. Specifically, in "left", "middle" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R (for example, "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R) in advance The decorative pattern display area (for example, "inside") which is not displayed as stopped when the decorative pattern (for example, the decorative symbol showing "7" alphanumeric characters) constituting the defined big hit combination is stopped and displayed In the display mode in which the decorative pattern changes in the symbol display area 5C, etc., or the decorative pattern is a big hit in all or part of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of "left", "middle", "right" It is a display mode which is fluctuating synchronously while constituting all or a part of the combination.

  In addition, in response to the reach mode, the variation speed of the decorative symbol is reduced, or a character image (effect image imitating a person or the like) different from the decorative symbol is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. Or, by changing the display mode of the background image, reproducing and displaying a moving image different from the decorative pattern, or changing the fluctuation mode of the decorative pattern, a different rendering operation than before reaching the reach mode is executed. May be Such a rendering operation such as display of a character image or change in display mode of a background image, reproduction display of a moving image, or change in change mode of a decorative pattern is referred to as reach effect display (or simply reach effect display). In the reach effect, not only the display operation in the image display device 5, but also the sound output operation by the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation (flashing operation) in the light emitter such as the game effect lamp 9, etc. An operation mode different from the operation mode may be included.

  As the rendering operation in the reach rendering, a plurality of types of rendering patterns (also referred to as “reach patterns”) having different operation modes (rendering modes) may be prepared in advance. Then, the possibility of becoming a "big hit" (also referred to as "reliability" or "big hit reliability", "expected degree" or "big hit expectation") differs depending on the presentation mode in each reach effect. That is, the possibility that the variable display result will be the "big hit" can be differentiated depending on which of the plurality of reach effects is executed. In this embodiment, reach effects such as normal, super A, super B, and super C are set in advance as an example. The reach effects of super AC in this embodiment are reach effects in which a plurality of characters fight. Below, the reach production of super AC may be called super reach AC, and the reach production of normal may be called normal reach.

  As described above, super reach A to C in this embodiment are reach effects in which a plurality of characters fight. In the super reach A to C, for example, the characters to be fight may be different, and the super reach A to C may be set to different presentation modes. In the super A or B, when the predetermined character wins the battle, the variable display result is "big hit", and when the predetermined character loses the battle, the variable display result is "loss". If Super Reach C is executed, Super Reach A may be executed after Super Reach C is executed (it may develop into Super Reach A). When the super reach C is executed but the super reach A does not develop (for example, when the predetermined character loses the battle), the variable display result is "loss". On the other hand, in the case of developing into super reach A (for example, when a predetermined character wins a battle), the variable display result may be a "big hit".

  Depending on which reach effect is executed, the variable display result of the variable display may become "big hit" (in the present embodiment, "big hit" where the big hit type is "non-probability change" or "probability change") The jackpot expectation) changes. For example, the jackpot expectation rate is higher when super reach AC is executed than when normal reach is executed. Also, among the super reach, when super reach A (including the case of development from super reach C) is executed, super reach B is executed or super reach C is executed (super reach Big hit expectation is higher than (when it does not develop to A). On the contrary, when Super Reach C is executed, the jackpot expectation may be higher than when Super Reach B is executed or Super Reach A is executed. In this case, super reach C may be executed after the execution of super reach A (may be developed to super reach C).

  The jackpot expectation is, for example, (probability that the effect will be executed at the time of big hit) × (probability of becoming the big hit) / {(probability that the effect will be executed at the time of big hit) × (probability of becoming the big hit) + (except for big hit time (Probability that the effect will be executed) × (probability that will not be a big hit)}) (If the big hit expectation is “1”, the variable display result will always be a “big hit”. Hereinafter, the big hit expectation The same for degrees).

  Unlike the reach effect, the variable display state of the decorative pattern may reach the reach state during the variable display of the decorative pattern, or the variable display result may become the "big hit", etc. A variable display effect may be executed to notify the player by a variable display mode of the decorative symbol. In this embodiment, the description is omitted to facilitate understanding, but, for example, variable display effects such as “slip” and “simulated link” can be performed. It may be determined whether or not to execute the variable display effect of “slip” or “pseudo-run” in response to the change pattern being determined on the main substrate 11 side. It should be noted that whether or not the variable display effect of “slip” is to be executed on the effect control substrate 12 side may be determined regardless of the variation pattern determined on the main substrate 11 side.

  In the variable display effect of "slip", after changing the decorative design in all of the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of "left", "middle", "right", a plurality of decorative design display areas (for example, After the decorative symbols are displayed on the left and right decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5R etc. for a temporary stop, a predetermined number (for example, "1" or "2") of the decorative symbol display areas displayed for temporary stop By changing the decoration pattern again in the decoration pattern display area (for example, one or both of the decoration pattern display area 5L of “left” and the decoration pattern display area 5R of “right”) The effect display for changing the decorative pattern to be stopped and displayed is performed. Thus, in the variable display effect of "slip", a plurality of decorative symbols are displayed temporarily for a predetermined number of times after variable display of decorative symbols is started and fixed decorative symbols to be variable display results are derived and displayed. By performing the variable display again for the decorative symbol of when the variable display state of the decorative symbol is in the reach state and when the decorative symbol that constitutes the non-reach combination is stopped and displayed without being in the reach state is there.

  In the variable display effect of "pseudo ream", the variable display of the decorative symbol is started after the variable display of the decorative symbol is started corresponding to one of the first start condition and the second start condition of the special figure game being met once After displaying the decorative symbols temporarily in all of the left, middle, and right decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R until the finalized decorative symbols are derived and displayed. Effects can be displayed a predetermined number of times (for example, up to a maximum of three times, etc.) in which all the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R change the decorative symbol again (re-fluctuating). The number of times of pseudo run variation in this embodiment is "left", "middle", "right" except for the first change from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol to the temporary stop of all the decorative symbols at first. In the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "", it indicates the number of times that the decorative symbol changes again in all.

  In the variable display effect of "pseudo ream", for example, one of a plurality of types of pseudo reciprocation chances predetermined in the left, "middle" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R Once the decorative design that makes up the is temporarily displayed as a predetermined display result, then the variable display (re-variation) is performed again. The pseudo-continuous chance may include a combination of decorative patterns that is a predetermined non-reach combination, without the variable display mode of decorative patterns becoming a reach mode. In addition, after the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes the reach mode, the pseudo continuous chance may include the combination of the decorative symbol that becomes a predetermined reach loss combination (also simply referred to as “reach combination”). For example, a special decorative symbol (a pseudo continuous chance symbol which is not used in a variable display of a decorative symbol at a normal time) is displayed in the decorative symbol display area 5C of "middle" among the pseudo continuous chance eyes. ) May be used. Among the decorative symbols used also in the variable display of the decorative symbol at the normal time, a pseudo-continuous chance symbol which becomes a pseudo-continuous chance eye by being stopped and displayed in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C may be included .

  In the variable display effect of "pseudo series", re-variation (pseudo series variation) is performed, and based on the first start condition or the second start condition being met once, it seems as if variable display of the decorative symbol is multiple times It can be seen as if it were started continuously.

  As the variable display effect using the variable display operation of such a decorative pattern, in addition to "slip" and "pseudo ream", for example, "development chance eye", "development chance eye end", "slip after stop chance" And various other rendering operations may be performed. Here, in the variable display effect of “the development chance eye”, “left”, “middle”, “right” until variable decoration result of the decorative symbol is started and the fixed decorative symbol as the variable display result is derived and displayed. In the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R in all, the temporary display of the decorative symbol constituting the development chance included in the predetermined special combination, and then the variable display state of the decorative symbol is in a reach state As a predetermined reach effect is started. Thereby, when the decorative symbol constituting the development chance is temporarily stopped, the variable display state of the decorative symbol is in the reach state, and after the reach state, the variable display result is the "big hit". Expectations are enhanced.

  In addition, in the variable display effect of "development chance eye end", after the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, in all in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of "left", "middle", "right" An effect display is performed in which a decorative symbol of a combination predetermined as a development opportunity is derived and displayed as a fixed decorative symbol. In the variable display effect of "slip after chance stop", similarly to the variable display effect of "pseudo ream", until after the variable display of the decorative symbol is started and the finalized decorative symbol to be the variable display result is derived and displayed After temporarily stopping and displaying the decorative symbol of the lost combination (special combination) which becomes a pseudo recurrent chance in all of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R in the "left", "middle", and "right" Unlike the variable display effect of “pseudo series” in which the decorative symbol is again changed in all of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, the decorative symbol is changed again in part of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R As a result, effect display is performed to change the decorative pattern to be stopped and displayed.

  In addition, unlike the variable display effect such as reach effect or “pseudo series” during the variable display of the decorative pattern, for example, a predetermined effect image is displayed, or an image display or an audio output as a message. The possibility that the variable symbol display of the decorative symbol may reach the reach condition by the effect operation different from the variable symbol display operation of the decorative symbol, that the reach effect by the super reach may be executed, the variable display result In some cases, a notice effect may be performed to notify the player in advance that there is a possibility that the player will be a "big hit".

  The production operation to be the advance production is the display mode of the decorative symbol after the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in all of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R of "left", "middle" and "right" It is sufficient if it is performed (started) before the reach mode is reached (before the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R). Moreover, what is performed after the variable display mode of a decorative symbol turns into a reach mode may be included in the preliminary announcement effect which alert | reports that a variable display result may become a "big hit". In this manner, the notice effect can be a big hit gaming state at a predetermined timing from when the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is started to when the finalized special symbol or the fixed decorative symbol is derived as the variable display result. It should be something that can give notice of sex. A plurality of advance notice patterns are prepared in advance, corresponding to the contents (effect mode) of the effect operation in the case of executing such advance effect.

  Among the advance notice effects are those that become advance read advance notice effects (also referred to as read ahead effects). In the pre-reading advance notice effect, the variable display result is “big hit” according to the presentation mode before the variable display is performed, which is the target (notice target) for which the possibility of the variable display result being “big hit” etc. It is a notice effect that can give notice of the possibility of becoming In particular, the pre-read notice effect for continuously giving notice over the variable display of the decorative symbol executed a plurality of times corresponding to a plurality of special drawing games is also referred to as a continuous notice effect. In preview advance notice effect, prior to the start of the variable display to be notified, for example, based on the pending storage of the special drawing game due to the occurrence of the start winning, etc. to notice the possibility that the variable display result will be "big hit" A presentation operation for the game is started.

  For example, the possibility of becoming a "big hit" in the variable display that is the object of advance notice by changing the display of the hold display in the start winning game storage display area 5H to a display mode different from the display mode at the normal time Pre-read notice effect of "hold display change" for giving a notice such as is performed. More specifically, the display color at the display site that displays the number of stored special images can be specified is a specific color (for example, red, green, blue, or white) different from the predetermined color (for example, gray) at the normal time. And the like (for example, a round shape) different from the shape (for example, a round shape) at the normal time, it may be notified that the possibility that the variable display result will be “big hit” is higher than usual. In addition, the possibility that the variable display result will be a "big hit" is higher than usual by setting the display pattern of the pending display in the start winning memory display area 5H to a specific pattern (for example, a cherry pattern etc.) different from that at normal times. May be notified. Alternatively, by providing a display mode indicating a predetermined message (for example, "secret" or the like) as the hold display, it is possible to notify (suggest) that the possibility of the display color changing to the specific color is higher than usual. Good. The pending display which suggests that such a display mode is likely to change to a specific mode is also referred to as a suggested pending display. The pre-read notice effect of "hold display change" is also referred to as hold change effect. It should be noted that, in contrast to the pre-read advance notice effect, the notice effect whose execution is started after the variable display to be a notice object is started is an independent advance notice effect (also referred to as a single advance notice, the corresponding change advance notice, or a notice announcement effect during variable display) It is called. In this embodiment, an effect of changing the display mode of the hold display of the notice target is performed so that it is possible to recognize which hold the variable display to be the notice target is, as the pre-reading effect of the "hold display change". May be Specifically, an effect image indicating a prepared character (character for change effect) is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, and an operation effect such as exerting an action on the hold display corresponding to the variable display to be a notice target As a result, it is possible to recognize which hold is on the variable display to be notified. In addition, in order to facilitate understanding, in this embodiment, the pending display for the advance notice is the execution timing of the action effect (the timing at which it can be recognized which pending display of the variable display for the advance notice is). Although the timing at which the shift is made first is made, the execution timing of the operation effect may be determined at a different ratio depending on the variable display result, which one of the multiple shifts is to be made. Although details will be described later, there are cases where effect presentation is performed and cases where operation presentation is not performed in the look-ahead effect of “hold display change” in this embodiment, and when the effect presentation is not performed, it is for change effect The mode is changed so that it is possible to recognize which hold of the variable display to be a notice target is held without displaying the character.

  The previewing notice effect executed based on the occurrence of the start winning is executed (started) before the player can determine whether or not the notice content by the advance notice producing is realized after the occurrence of the start winning. As long as it is For example, the prefetching notice effect for informing that there is a possibility of reaching the reach state by the occurrence of a certain start winning, from at least the variable display state of the decorative symbol based on the occurrence of the start winning becomes reach state (or non reach state) What is necessary is to be executed (started) before. In addition, the pre-reading advance notice effect foretelling that the variable display result may become a "big hit" by the occurrence of a certain start winning is more than the fixed decoration symbol being stopped and displayed at least in the variable display based on the occurrence of the starting winning. What is necessary is to be executed (started) before.

  In this embodiment, as an example of a single advance notice effect, by changing the display of the effect image in the active display area 5HA to a display mode different from the display mode at the normal time, “big hit in the variable display in which the start condition is satisfied. A notice effect of “active display change” is performed to give notice of the possibility of becoming “.” More specifically, the display color in the active display area 5HA is a specific color (for example, any of red, green, blue, white, etc.) different from a predetermined color (for example, gray) at the normal time and a shape at the normal time By making the shape different, it may be informed that the possibility of the variable display result being a "big hit" is higher than usual. In addition, by making the icon displayed in the active display area 5HA a specific icon different from the round plain color at the normal time, for example, a message such as “?”, “Chance”, “extensive heat” or the like can be notified, It may be suggested that the variable display result may be a "big hit". In addition, the icon displayed in the active display area 5HA has an icon notifying a message such as "NEXT", for example, to notify that a pseudo continuous change in a variable display effect of "pseudo run" is to be performed. It is also good. The notice effect of "active display change" is also referred to as active change effect.

  Specifically, in the active change effect according to this embodiment, an effect image (effect image displayed at the time of the on-hold display effect) showing the character (character for change effect) prepared in advance is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 The display color is performed by performing an effect on the display (active display) of the active display area 5HA at the timing when the hold display (targeted display of the target of the hold change presentation) of the notice target is shifted (shifted) to the active display area 5HA. There are cases in which the display color of the active display is changed without the effect presentation being performed. As described above, in this embodiment, as the on-hold change effect, an effect of changing the display mode is performed so that it can be recognized which on-hold of the variable display to be the advance target is. Then, an active change effect is performed as a single advance notice effect, and the on-hold display in which the display mode changes changes to the active display area 5 HA, and the display color changes. That is, first, the notice target is shown in the hold change presentation, and the display color changes in the active change production (the big hit expectation is suggested). This series of productions (hold change presentation and active change presentation) In this embodiment, it is called hold / active change presentation. In this embodiment, in order to facilitate the understanding, in the pending change presentation, the player is able to recognize the advance notice object and the jackpot expectation degree is suggested by the active transition presentation (ie, in the active change presentation) Although an example in which the display color changes first) is shown, the display color may be changed in the hold change effect to indicate the jackpot expectation. Specifically, the display color may be changed in the on-hold change effect, and in the active change effect, the display color may not be changed, or the display color may be changed in the on-hold change effect, and also displayed in the active change effect. The color may be changed. For example, every time the hold display shifts in the hold change effect, the display color is changed stepwise (including when it is not changed even when the shift is made), and active shift effect is performed when shifting to the active display area 5HA. The color may be changed (the effect of the cast may be performed). Further, in the on-hold / active change presentation in this embodiment, all the on-hold displays and active displays displayed on the display including the on-hold display of the notice target may be enlarged and displayed. Specifically, although it will be described later, in the suspension / active change presentation, when the suspension / active change presentation is started, in which the display color changes to green or red, it is being displayed for a period until the suspension / active change presentation ends All the pending display and the active display may be enlarged (the enlarged display is not performed in the pending / active change effect in which the display color changes to white or blue). In addition, when the hold / active change effect to be enlarged is started, a small screen as a specific display area is displayed in the image display device 5 and an image displayed in the hold / active change effect (for example, a hold display) All displays other than the active display, the character image in the action effect, etc.) are performed on the small screen as the specific display area. The small screen display ends when the hold / active change effect ends (display control in the specific display area ends). The various images displayed on the small screen may have the same ratio as the image displayed on the image display 5 (for example, the screen size of the image display 5 is 10 and the screen size of the small screen If 1 is 1, the image displayed on the small screen should have a ratio of 1/10 of the size displayed on the image display device 5). Further, in this embodiment, when enlargement display is not performed, no effect presentation is performed in the hold / active change presentation, but, for example, an effect presentation is performed by displaying a small character image, etc. You may perform an effect presentation by the aspect different from the case where enlarged display is performed.

  Further, in this embodiment, as the pre-reading advance notice effect, the movable body is displayed each time the variable display is performed during a period until the variable display corresponding to the suspension of the preview object is performed (including the variable display of the suspension of the preview object). A movable body effect to rotate 99 is executed. Specifically, the movable body effect is performed in a plurality of variable displays until variable display of the hold of the advance notice is performed, and is performed for a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds) from the start of each variable display. At that time, in the image display device 5, an effect image is displayed, and a display is performed to effectively make the movable body 99 operate.

  That is, in this embodiment, two types of pre-reading effects such as hold / active change effect and movable object effect are performed, but these may be performed independently or may be performed in duplicate. In addition, movable object special effects are referred to as movable object effects when the on-hold / active change effect for which enlarged display is performed and the movable object effect are performed in an overlapping manner. In the movable body special effect, the effect image is displayed on a small screen as a specific display area displayed on the image display device 5. This makes it possible for the player to easily recognize that the movable body 99 is rotating, and to prevent the on-hold display and the active display from becoming unrecognizable.

  When the special figure display result which is the variable display result of the special symbol in the special figure game is "big hit", a finalized decorative figure to be a predetermined big hit combination is derived and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. As an example, a big hit combination is decided by the same decorative pattern being aligned and stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of "left", "middle", "right" The decorative pattern may be derived and displayed.

  When the jackpot type is “non-deterministic change”, a definite decoration pattern to be a non-probability change big-hit combination may be derived. For example, the fixed decorative symbol to be the non-probable variation big hit combination has symbol number “1” which is variably displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of “left”, “middle”, “right” in the image display device 5, for example. Among the decorative symbols of “8”, any one of the decorative symbols whose symbol numbers are “2”, “4”, “6” and “8” is “left”, “middle” and “right” The decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are all displayed on the predetermined effective line and stop-displayed, and may be one type of finalized decorative symbol that is a big hit combination. A decorative symbol whose symbol number constituting the non-probable variation big hit combination is an even number “2”, “4”, “6”, “8” in this way is called non-probability variation symbol.

  When the jackpot type is "ceremony change", a finalized decorative symbol may be derived which is a non-probable variable jackpot combination, or a finalized decorative symbol which may be a probability variation big hit combination may be derived. For example, the fixed decorative symbols to be used in the probability variation big hit combination have symbol numbers “1” to “1” which are variably displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of “left”, “middle” and “right” in the image display device 5 Among the decorative symbols of "8", any one of the decorative symbols whose symbol numbers are "1", "3", "5" and "7" is "left", "middle" and "right" It is displayed on the predetermined effective line in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R and is stopped and displayed, and it is sufficient if it is one kind of a finalized decorative symbol that is a big hit combination. A decorative symbol whose symbol number constituting the probability variation big hit combination is an odd number “1”, “3”, “5”, “7” in this way is called a probability variation symbol.

  During the variable display of the decorative symbol that the finalized decorative symbol becomes the non-probable variation big hit combination or the positive variation big hit combination, the re-lottery effect may be executed. In the re-lottery effect, for example, after temporarily displaying a decorative pattern to be a non-probable variation big hit combination on the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R in the image display device 5, for example The left "," "middle", "right" decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, 5R again in the state that the same decorative symbol is aligned, and decorative symbol (probable symbol) and non-deterministic big hit combination, Of the decorative symbols (non-probable variable symbols) to be the probability variation big hit combination, one is displayed as a finalized display symbol (final stop display) as a finalized decorative symbol. Here, when the re-lottery effect is executed when the jackpot type is "non-deterministic change", the decoration pattern that has been temporarily stopped is re-varied as the re-lottery effect, and then the fixed decoration that becomes the non-probable change big hit combination A re-lottery disappointing effect is performed in which the symbols are derived and displayed. On the other hand, when the re-lottery effect is executed when the jackpot type is "certain change", the decoration pattern that has been temporarily stopped is re-varied as the re-lottery effect, and then the fixed decoration becomes the positive change big hit combination The re-lottery winning effect for stopping and displaying the symbol may be performed, or the re-lottery losing effect may be performed.

  When the jackpot type is "probable change", the decoration pattern which is non probability change big hit combination is displayed once during the variable display of the decoration pattern, and the re-lottery effect is executed during the variable display, and the subsequent big hit gaming state A jackpot promotion effect may be executed at the end of the middle or jackpot gaming state, and the start of control to be a positive change state may be notified. During the jackpot promotion state, during the start of the jackpot gaming state or during the round in the jackpot gaming state, in the jackpot gaming state, from the end of any round in the jackpot gaming state to the start of the next round In the period from the end of the last round to the start of the next variable display game, etc., a definite change notification of whether to control in a positive change state or not is performed. Note that the same notification effect as the jackpot promotion promotion may be executed during the first variable display game after the end of the jackpot gaming state or the like. The jackpot promotion promotion that is executed after the final round in the jackpot gaming state may be referred to in particular as "ending promotion promotion". The start of control to be a probability change state may be notified without the re-lottery effect or the jackpot promotion effect being executed.

  When the special drawing display result is "loss", the decorative display forming the predetermined non-reach combination is stopped and displayed without the variable display mode of the decorative design being the reach mode, and the non-specific display result The finalized decorative design that is In addition, when the special figure display result becomes “losing”, after the variable display mode of the decorative pattern becomes the reach mode, the decorative pattern that constitutes a predetermined reach combination (also referred to as “reach losing combination”) is stopped and displayed As a result, a finalized decorative symbol that is a nonspecific display result may be derived and displayed.

  Next, main operations (actions) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment will be described.

  In the main substrate 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply substrate is started, the gaming control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes predetermined processing to be gaming control main processing. When the game control main processing is started, the CPU 103 sets the interrupt prohibition and then performs necessary initialization. In this initial setting, for example, the RAM 102 is cleared. Further, the register setting of the CTC (counter / timer circuit) built in the game control microcomputer 100 is performed. As a result, thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing. When initialization is complete, after enabling the interrupt, it enters loop processing. In the game control main process, the loop process may be entered after executing the process for restoring the internal state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the state at the time of the previous power supply stop.

  When the CPU 103 having executed such a game control main process receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives an interrupt request, the CPU 103 sets the interrupt disable state and executes predetermined game control timer interrupt processing. The game control timer interrupt process includes, for example, a switch process, a main side error process, an information output process, a game random number update process, a special symbol process process, a normal symbol process process, and a command control process. Includes processing to control the progress of the

  The switch process is a process of determining the state of detection signals input from various switches such as the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the count switch 23 through the switch circuit 110. The main side error processing is processing for diagnosing abnormality of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and enabling generation of a warning if necessary according to the result of the diagnosis. The information output process is a process of outputting data such as jackpot information, start information, probability fluctuation information and the like supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. The game random number updating process is a process for updating at least a part of the plurality of types of game random numbers used on the main substrate 11 side by software.

  As an example, random numbers for special display display determination, a random number MR2 for determination of a big hit type, and a random number MR3 for variation pattern determination are used as random numbers for gaming used on the main substrate 11 side. It should be included (see FIG. 6). The random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is a random number value used to determine whether or not to control the big hit gaming state with a variable display result such as a special symbol in the special figure game as a "big hit". It can take any value of "65535". The random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type is used to determine the jackpot type as any of a plurality of types, such as "non-probability change" or "probability change", when the variable display result is set as "big hit". It is a random number value and can take any value of "1" to "100". The random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is a random number value used to determine the variation pattern in the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol as any of a plurality of patterns prepared in advance, and “1” to “251 It can take one of the following values:

  In the special symbol process process included in the timer control process for game control, the value of the special view process flag provided in the RAM 102 is updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the display in the special symbol display device 4 Various processes are selected and executed in order to perform control of operation and opening / closing operation setting of the special winning opening in the special variable winning prize ball device 7 in a predetermined procedure. The normal symbol process processing controls the display operation (for example, lighting and extinguishing of the segment LED, etc.) in the normal symbol display 20, and the variable display of the normal symbol and the tilting operation setting of the movable wing in the normally variable winning ball device 6B, etc. Is a process that enables

  The command control process is a process of transmitting a control command from the main board 11 to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 or the like. As an example, in the special symbol process processing and the ordinary symbol process processing, the transmission setting of the control command (such as the effect control command) is set to the command transmission table (predetermined for each command in the ROM 101 according to the effect control command to be sent ) Is specified (for example, the value of the storage address is stored in a transmission command buffer provided in the RAM 102), etc., and provided in the RAM 102 in the command control process. Of the output ports included in I / O 105, corresponding to the setting in the command transmission table designated by the value of the transmission command buffer (for example, the value indicating the storage address etc. in ROM 101) Send the production control command After setting control data to the output port for setting the predetermined control data to the output port of the effect control INT signal and setting the effect control INT signal to the on state for a predetermined time and then turning it off, etc. It enables transmission of effect control commands (effect control commands set for transmission) based on settings in the transmission table. After executing the command control process, the game control timer interrupt process is ended after setting to the interrupt enabled state.

  FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol process processing. In the special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101). FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of the start winning determination process executed in step S101.

  When the start winning determination process is started, the CPU 103 first determines the first start opening based on the detection signal from the first start opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first start opening formed by the normal winning ball device 6A. It is determined whether the switch 22A is on (step S201). At this time, if the first starting opening switch 22A is on (step S201; Yes), the number of first special drawing pending storages, which is the number of pending storages of the special drawing game using the first special figure, is a predetermined upper limit It is determined whether or not (for example, "4") (step S202). At this time, the CPU 103 reads the first reserved memory number count value, which is the stored value of the first reserved memory number counter provided in a predetermined area (such as a game control counter setting unit) of the RAM 102, thereby suspending the first special view. It is sufficient if the number of memories can be specified. When the first special figure reservation storage number is not the upper limit value in step S202 (step S202; No), the starting opening which is the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in a predetermined area (such as a game control buffer setting unit) of the RAM 102 The buffer value is set to "1" (step S203).

  When the first start port switch 22A is off at step S201 (step S201; No), or when the number of first special view storages has reached the upper limit at step S202 (step S202; Yes) Whether or not the second starting opening switch 22B is on is determined based on a detection signal from the second starting opening switch 22B provided corresponding to the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B ( Step S204). At this time, if the second starting opening switch 22B is on (step S204; Yes), the number of second special view pending storages, which is the number of pending storages of the special view game using the second special view, is a predetermined upper limit It is determined whether (for example, "4") is set (step S205). At this time, the CPU 103 reads the second hold storage count value, which is a storage value of a second hold storage count counter provided in a predetermined area (such as a game control counter setting unit) of the RAM 102, to hold the second special view hold. It is sufficient if the number of memories can be specified. When it is determined in step S205 that the second special figure storage number is not the upper limit (step S205; No), the starting opening buffer value is set to "2" (step S206). If the second starting port switch 22B is not on (step S204; No), or if the number of second tomogram storage is the upper limit (step S205; Yes), the start winning determination process is ended.

  After one of the processes in steps S203 and S206 is executed, the pending storage count value corresponding to the starting opening buffer value is updated so as to be incremented by 1 (step S207). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is “1”, the first pending storage number count value is incremented by one, while when the starting opening buffer value is “2”, the second pending storage number count value is incremented by one. Thus, the first reserved memory number count value is increased by 1 (increment when the game ball enters the first start winning opening and the first start condition corresponding to the special view game using the first special figure is satisfied). ) To be updated. Also, the second reserved memory number count value is incremented by 1 (increment when the game ball enters the second start winning opening and the second start condition corresponding to the special view game using the second special figure is satisfied). ) To be updated. At this time, the total on-hold storage number count value, which is the storage value of the on-hold storage number counter provided in a predetermined area (such as a game control counter setting unit) of the RAM 102, is updated to add 1 (step S208).

  After executing the processing of step S208, the CPU 103 extracts a predetermined gaming random number corresponding to the occurrence of the start winning (step S209). As an example, in the process of step S209, the random number circuit 104 or random value data updated by a random counter or the like provided in a predetermined area (such as a game control counter setting unit) of the RAM 102 Numerical data representing the numerical value MR1, the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern are extracted (see FIG. 6). Numeric data representing each random number value extracted in this manner is stored as hold data at the top of the empty entry in the special view hold storage unit according to the start port buffer value (step S210). For example, when the start port buffer value is “1”, the hold data is set in the first special view hold storage unit as shown in FIG. 7 (A). On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is "2", the hold data is set in the second special view hold storage unit as shown in FIG. 7B.

  The first special figure reservation storage unit shown in FIG. 7A is not yet started although the game ball enters the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 6A and the first start winning occurs. The reserve data of the special drawing game (the special drawing game using the first special drawing in the first special symbol display device 4A) is stored. As an example, the first special view reserve storage unit is associated with the reserve number in the winning order (the order of detecting the game balls) to the first start winning opening, and based on the establishment of the first start condition by the entry of the game balls. The number of stored data is the random number value MR1 for special figure display result determination extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104 or the like, the random number value MR2 for big hit type determination, and numerical data indicating the random pattern value MR3 for variation pattern determination Are stored until a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4") is reached. The reserve data thus stored in the first special view reserve storage unit indicates that execution (variable display) of the special view game using the first special view is suspended, and the variable display result in the special view game ( It is possible to determine whether or not it is decided to control to the big hit gaming state based on the special figure display result), and whether the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes a specific mode (for example, reach effect of super reach etc.) It becomes pending storage information.

  The second special figure reserve storage unit shown in FIG. 7 (B) is still started although the game ball enters the second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball device 6B and the second start winning occurs. Hold data of no special figure game (special figure game using second special figure in second special symbol display device 4B) is stored. As an example, the second special view reserve storage unit is associated with the reserve number in the winning order (the detection order of the game balls) to the second start winning opening, and based on the establishment of the second start condition by the entry of the game balls. The random number value MR1 for special figure display result determination extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104 or the like, the random number value MR2 for big hit type determination, the numerical data indicating the random pattern value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination, etc. It stores until it reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). The reserve data thus stored in the second special view reserve storage unit indicates that the execution (variable display) of the special view game using the second special view is suspended, and the variable display result in the special view game ( It is possible to determine whether or not it is decided to control to the big hit gaming state based on the special figure display result), and whether the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes a specific mode (for example, reach effect of super reach etc.) It becomes pending storage information.

  Subsequent to the process of step S210, the CPU 103 performs a start winning determination process (step S211). The start winning determination process is a process for so-called pre-reading. In this embodiment, when variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is started, the special symbol display result (variable display result of the special symbol) by the special symbol normal processing (step S110 in FIG. 4, FIG. 9) described later. A determination is made as to whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state with the "big hit". Further, in a variation pattern setting process (step S111 in FIG. 4, FIG. 11) to be described later, determination of a variation pattern that specifically defines the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is performed.

  On the other hand, separately from these decisions, the CPU 103 executes the winning determination process of step S211 at the timing when the game ball is detected at the start winning opening (the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening). , Determination of whether the special figure display result of the special figure game executed by the current start winning combination will be "big hit", the display mode with a variable display mode of the decorative symbol executed by the current start winning combination with a reach It is determined whether or not As a result, before the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol based on the detection of the game ball entering the start winning opening is started, the special pattern display result becomes "big hit", or the variable display mode of the decorative symbol Predict the display mode with reach, etc., and change the color of the hold display by the effect control CPU 120 or the like on the side of the effect control board 12 based on the prediction result, the color of the hold change effect or the color of the active display It can be determined whether to perform an active change rendition that changes the.

  FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing an example of the start winning determination process. The CPU 103 first confirms, for example, the state of a short time flag (a flag which is turned on in the short time state) or a positive change flag (a flag which is turned on in the definite state) which is provided in a predetermined area in the RAM 102, or the like. The present gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is specified (step S401). The CPU 103 identifies the definite variation state when the definite variation flag is on, identifies the short time status when the short time flag is on, and the normal condition when both the probable variation flag and the short time flag are off. It should be specified.

  Subsequent to the process of step S401, the CPU 103 selects a table prepared corresponding to the current gaming state from among a plurality of special figure display result determination tables prepared by storing in a predetermined area of the ROM 101 in advance. It selects and sets to a use table (step S402). A plurality of special view display result determination tables are prepared in accordance with whether the gaming state is a definite change state or the like. In the special figure display result determination table, for example, as shown in FIG. 10A, the numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random number value MR1 for special figure display result determination designates the special figure display result as “big hit”. What is necessary is just to be assigned to the determination result of which one of "loss".

  For example, as a special figure display result determination table, a special figure display result determination table (see FIG. 10A) corresponding to the non-probability state and the probability state is prepared. The CPU 103 sets a table corresponding to the current gaming state from the ROM 101 to the RAM 102 by setting the table in the use table.

  After that, the CPU 103 determines whether the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special image display result extracted in step S209 of FIG. 5 is within the predetermined big hit determination range (step S403). In the jackpot determination range, individual decision values assigned to the special chart display result of "big hit" in the use table set in the process of step S402 are set, and the CPU 103 compares the random value MR1 with each decision value one by one. By doing this, it is only necessary to be able to determine the presence or absence of a decision value that matches the random value MR1. Alternatively, the CPU 103 sets the random number MR1 and the minimum value and the maximum value of the big hit determination range by setting numerical values indicating the minimum value (lower limit value) and the maximum value (upper limit value) of the determination values included in the big hit determination range. It is only necessary to be able to determine whether or not the random value MR1 is within the range of the jackpot determination range by comparison. At this time, by determining that the random value MR1 is within the range of the big hit determination range, it can be determined that the variable display result based on the pending data including the random value MR1 is determined as "big hit" (big hit start determination) .

  If it is determined in step S403 that it is not within the jackpot determination range (step S403; No), the CPU 103 displays a display result specification command (determination at start winning) according to the case where the variable display result is "loss". A transmission setting is performed to transmit to the effect control board 12 a command specifying "losing" as a display result of the results (step S405).

  If it is determined in step S403 that it is within the jackpot determination range (step S403; Yes), the CPU 103 determines the jackpot type based on the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination (step S409). At this time, the CPU 103 refers to the jackpot type determination table prepared in advance by storing in a predetermined area of the ROM 101 or the like. In the jackpot type determination table, for example, as shown in FIG. 10 (B), the numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination determines that the jackpot type is “non-probability variation” or “probability variation”. It may be assigned to the decision result of which one. The CPU 103 sets the jackpot type assigned to the decision value that matches the random value MR2 as the present determination result. The display control command according to the determination result in the process of step S409 (command for specifying "big hit" of "probable variation" or "non-probable variation" as the display result among the determination results at the start winning), A transmission setting for transmission is performed for 12 (step S410).

  After executing any of the processes of steps S405 and S410, the CPU 103 transmits, to the effect control board 12, a variation category command (a command specifying the variation category among the determination results at the start winning). Transmission setting is performed (step S413).

  After step S413, the CPU 103 performs transmission setting of the start winning combination designation command (step S414). The 1st start winning a prize mouth specified command here is the production control baseplate 12 as the production control information which notifies the increase of the 1st special figure reservation memory count, when the 1st starting condition is satisfied by the occurrence of the 1st start winning a prize Sent to the Further, the second start winning opening designation command is used as effect control information of effect control board 12 for notifying an increase in the second special view reservation storage number when the second start condition is satisfied by the occurrence of the second start winning. Sent to the side. After step S414, the winning determination process ends.

  Again, referring back to FIG. Thereafter, the CPU 103 determines whether the starting opening buffer value is "1" or "2" (step S212). At this time, if the starting opening buffer value is "2" (step S212; "2"), the starting opening buffer is cleared and the stored value is initialized to "0" (step S213), and the starting winning combination is made. The determination process ends. On the other hand, when the starting port buffer value is "1" (step S212; "1"), the starting port buffer is cleared and the stored value is initialized to "0" (step S214), The process proceeds to step S204. As a result, even when both the first starting opening switch 22A and the second starting opening switch 22B simultaneously detect a starting winning combination of valid gaming balls, it is possible to surely complete the processing based on the detection of both starting starting winning combinations.

  After executing the start winning determination process in step S101 shown in FIG. 4, the CPU 103 executes steps S110 to S117 according to the value of the special view process flag provided in a predetermined area (such as a game control flag setting unit) of the RAM 102. Select and execute one of the following processing.

  The special symbol normal processing of step S110 is executed when the value of the special drawing process flag is "0". In this special symbol normal processing, the first special symbol display device 4A or 4A is based on the presence or absence of the pending data stored in the predetermined area of the RAM 102, such as the first special view pending storage unit or the second special view pending storage unit. A determination is made as to whether or not the special drawing game is to be started by the second special symbol display device 4B. Also, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special pattern display result, whether the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative pattern is "big hit" is the variable display result Make a decision (pre-decision) before being displayed. At this time, when the variable display result is determined to be "big hit", the big hit type is determined to be any of a plurality of types such as "non-probability change" or "probability change". The data indicating the determination result of the jackpot type is stored in the jackpot type buffer provided in a predetermined area (for example, a game control buffer setting unit) of the RAM 102, whereby the jackpot type is stored. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal processing, in response to the variable display result of the special symbol in the special symbol game, the finalized special symbol (big hit symbol, the special symbol in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B Missing symbol) is set. In the special symbol normal processing, when the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is determined in advance, the value of the special processing process flag is updated to “1”.

  FIG. 9 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S110 of FIG. 4 as the special symbol normal process. In the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 9, the CPU 103 first determines whether the number of second special view reservations is “0” (step S 231). The second special figure reservation storage count is the number of reserved storages of the special view game using the second special view by the second special symbol display device 4B. The CPU 103 may read the second hold storage count value and determine whether the read value is “0”.

  When the number of second special figure holding storages is other than "0" at step S231 (step S231; No), for example, the top area of the second special drawing holding storage unit (for example, the storage area corresponding to holding number "1") The numerical value data indicating a predetermined random number value is read out as pending data stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 (step S232). Thereby, the game random number extracted corresponding to the occurrence of the start winning (the second starting winning) at the second starting winning opening is read out in the process of step S209 shown in FIG. The numerical data read out at this time may be stored, for example, in a random number buffer for variation, and temporarily stored.

  Subsequent to the processing of step S232, the second special storage storage count is updated by subtracting one, for example, by subtracting the second storage storage count value by one, and the second special storage storage is updated. The stored contents in the unit are shifted (step S233). For example, the pending data stored in the storage area (the storage area corresponding to the pending numbers "2" to "4") lower than the pending number "1" in the second special view pending storage unit is advanced by one entry each shift. Further, in the process of step S233, the total pending storage number (total pending storage number count value) is updated so as to be decremented by one. Then, the variation special feature designation buffer value, which is the storage value of the variation special feature designation buffer provided in a predetermined area (for example, a game control buffer setting unit) of the RAM 102, is updated to "2" (step S234).

  When the number of second special figure holding memories is "0" at step S231 (step S231; Yes), it is determined whether the number of first special drawing holding memories is "0" (step S235). The first special view reservation storage number is the number of suspension storages of the special view game using the first special view by the first special symbol display device 4A. The CPU 103 may read the first pending storage count value and determine whether the read value is “0”. As described above, the process of step S235 is executed when it is determined in step S231 that the number of second special view reservations is “0”, and the number of first special views suspension storage is “0”. It is determined whether or not. As a result, the special view game using the second special view starts being executed with priority over the special view game using the first special view.

  In addition, regardless of whether it is the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening, the first starting winning opening when the special figure game is executed in the order in which the game balls enter the starting winning opening. The starting opening data indicating which of the second starting winning opening and the game ball has entered is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 in association with the holding data together with the holding data or separately from the holding data, The order in which the start conditions are satisfied may be specified for the special-figure games corresponding to the respective hold data.

  Subsequent to the process of step S 236, the first TOC pending memory number is updated by subtracting 1 by, for example, subtracting 1 from the 1st pending memory number count value, etc. The stored contents in the unit are shifted (step S237). For example, the pending data stored in the storage area (the storage area corresponding to the pending numbers “2” to “4”) lower than the pending number “1” in the first special view pending storage unit is advanced one entry at a time shift. Further, in the process of step S237, the total pending storage number (total pending storage number count value) is updated so as to be decremented by one. Then, the variation special feature designation buffer value is updated to "1" (step S238).

  After executing any of the processes of steps S234 and S238, the special figure display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbol, is determined as either "big hit" or "losing" (step S239). As an example, in the process of step S239, a special figure display result determination table prepared by storing in advance in a predetermined area of the ROM 101 is selected and set in the use table for determining the special figure display result. In the special figure display result determination table, for example, as shown in FIG. 10A, the numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random number value MR1 for special figure display result determination designates the special figure display result as “big hit”. It may be allocated according to the presence or absence of the probability change control in the probability change state (whether or not the gaming state is the probability change state) to the determination result of which of the “loss” is to be made. The CPU 103 reads, from the variation random number buffer, numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determination of the special view display result included in the game random number temporarily stored in the variation random number buffer in step S232 or S236, and the gaming state is in a definite state By referring to the special chart display result determination table set in the use table based on whether or not there is a numerical value data indicating the random number value MR1, the game state is irregular depending on whether or not it is a definite change state The determination result of either “big hit” or “losing” assigned to the determination value corresponding to the numerical value MR1 may be determined as the special view display result. The CPU 103 determines that the probability variation control is being performed when the probability variation flag (a flag that is turned on in the probability variation state) provided in a predetermined area (for example, a game control flag setting unit) of the RAM 102 is on. do it. For example, when the random number value MR1 is "9000", the CPU 103 determines that the special figure display result is "big hit" when the probability change flag is on (when probability change control is present), and the probability change flag is When it is in the off state (when there is no probability change control), it is determined that the special figure display result is to be "lost".

  As shown in FIG. 10A, when the probability change control is performed in the probability change state, the special view display result is “at a higher rate than when the probability change control is not performed in the normal state or the short time state. It is determined to be a "big hit". Therefore, for example, based on the fact that the probability change flag is set to the on state corresponding to the case where the jackpot type is "probable" by the jackpot end processing of step S117 shown in FIG. 4 (details will be described later). When the current gaming state is a definite change state, the special view display result is more likely to be a "big hit" and more likely to be a big hit game state than when the definite change control is not performed in the normal state or the time saving state.

  Thereafter, the CPU 103 determines whether the special map display result determined by the process of step S239 is a "big hit" (step S240). If the special view display result is determined to be "big hit" (step S240; Yes), the big hit flag provided in a predetermined area (for example, a game control flag setting unit) of the RAM 102 is set to the on state (step S241) .

  Also, the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types (step S 242). As an example, in the process of step S 242, a jackpot type determination table shown in the example prepared by storing in advance in a predetermined area of the ROM 101 is selected and set in the use table for determining the jackpot type. In the jackpot type determination table, depending on the numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination, the decision result as to which of the plural types ("probable variation", "non-probability variation") It should be assigned to (see FIG. 10 (B)). The CPU 103 reads, from the variation random number buffer, numeric data indicating the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type included in the gaming random number temporarily stored in the random number buffer for variation at step S232 or S236, and determines the random number MR2 for determining the big hit category. The jackpot type assigned to the decision value corresponding to the random number MR2 may be selected by referring to the determination table of the jackpot type set in the use table based on the numerical data indicating. For example, when the random number MR2 is "75", the CPU 103 determines (selects) "probability" as the big hit type.

  After the process of step S242 is performed, the jackpot type is stored (step S243). In the big hit type buffer provided in a predetermined area (for example, a game control buffer setting unit) of the RAM 102, the CPU 103 sets a big hit type buffer setting value (for example, as shown in FIG. The jackpot type may be stored by storing “0” in the case of “probable change” and “1” in the case of “probable change”.

  If the special view display result is not a "big hit" in step S240 (step S240; No) or after executing the process of steps S241 to S243, a finalized special symbol which is a variable display result of the special symbol in the special view game Are determined (step S246). As an example, when it is determined that the special figure display result is not a "big hit" in steps S240 and S244, a special symbol predetermined as a lost symbol is determined as a finalized special symbol. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S240 that the special view display result is "big hit", a plurality of big hit types according to the big hit type determination result in step S242 (according to the big hit type buffer setting value) Any one of the special symbols predetermined as the symbols may be determined as the determined special symbol.

  After the process of step S246 is performed, the value of the special view process flag is updated to "1" (step S247), and the special symbol normal processing is ended. When the value of the special processing process flag is updated to "1" in step S247, when the next timer interrupt occurs, the variation pattern setting process of step S111 shown in FIG. 4 is executed.

  If the number of reserved memories of the special drawing game using the first special drawing in step S235 is "0" (step S235; Yes), after performing a predetermined demonstration display setting (step S248), the special symbol End normal processing. In this demonstration display setting, for example, a presentation control command (waiting customer demonstration designation command) for specifying a demonstration display (demonstration screen display) by displaying a predetermined effect image on the image display device 5, etc. It is determined whether transmission to the substrate 12 has been completed. At this time, if it has already been sent, the demo display setting is ended as it is. On the other hand, if not sent, the setting for sending the customer waiting demo specification command is made, and then the demonstration display setting is ended. In the effect control board 12, when the customer waiting demo specification command is transmitted, the demonstration screen is displayed.

  The variation pattern setting process of step S111 in FIG. 4 is executed when the value of the special process process flag is “1”. The variation pattern setting process includes, for example, a process of determining the variation pattern as any one of a plurality of types based on a result of a prior determination as to whether or not the variable display result is to be a "big hit". Since the variation pattern designates the content (variable display mode) of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the content of the variable display of the decorative symbol is determined by this determination. The variable display time of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is preset corresponding to the variation pattern. Therefore, by determining the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation pattern setting process, the variable display time from when the variable display of the special symbol is started to when the determined special symbol to be the variable display result is derived is determined. In addition, the variation pattern setting process may include a process of determining whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is to be "reach" when the variable display result is "loss". Alternatively, even if it is determined whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is to be "reach" by determining the change pattern when the change display result is "loss" in the change pattern setting process at a predetermined ratio. Good. Furthermore, the variation pattern setting process may include a process of performing setting for starting the variation of the special symbol in the special symbol display device 4. When the variation pattern setting process is executed, the value of the special drawing process flag is updated to "2."

  FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S111 of FIG. 4 as the variation pattern setting process. In the fluctuation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 11, the CPU 103 first determines whether the big hit flag is on (step S261). Then, if the big hit flag is on (step S261; Yes), the variation pattern corresponding to the big hit when the special view display result is "big hit" is determined (step S262).

  If the big hit flag is off in step S261, the CPU 103 determines a variation pattern corresponding to the lost time when the special view display result is "loss" (step S265).

  FIG. 12 shows a variation pattern in this embodiment. In this embodiment, among the cases where the variable display result (special figure display result) is "loss", the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is "non reach" not to be the reach mode and "reach mode" Corresponding to each case of "reach", and also corresponding to the case where the variable display result (special figure display result) is "big hit" and the big hit type becomes "non-probability change" or "probability change", etc. Fluctuation patterns are prepared in advance.

  In this embodiment, fluctuation patterns PA1-1 to PA1-3 for normal time (non-time-short time) and fluctuation for time-short time as fluctuation patterns specifying variable display result as "losing" and "non-reach" Patterns PB1-1 and PB1-2 are prepared.

  In addition, a variation pattern is prepared in which the contents correspond to the case where the variable display result is "big hit" (big hit type is "big hit" or "non-big change" big hit) and when it is "losing". Specifically, a fluctuation pattern PA2-1 (for losing) and a fluctuation pattern PA3-1 ("big hit") for designating execution of normal reach are prepared. Further, a variation pattern PA2-2 (for losing) and a variation pattern PA3-2 ("big hit") designating execution of the super reach A are prepared. Further, a variation pattern PA2-3 (for losing) and a variation pattern PA3-3 ("big hit") for designating execution of the super reach B are prepared. Also, a variation pattern PA2-4 (for losing) and a variation pattern PA3-4 ("big hit") are prepared to specify that Super Reach C should be executed and then developed into Super Reach A.

  In the process of step S262 shown in FIG. 11, for example, a big hit variation pattern is determined using the big hit variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. As an example, in the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table, the numerical value (decision value) with which the jackpot type is compared with the random value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination in both cases of “non-probability change” and “probability change” is commonly It may be allocated to the determination result of the fluctuation pattern.

  The CPU 103 refers to the big hit fluctuation pattern determination table based on numerical data indicating the random value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination read out from the fluctuation random number buffer, and the fluctuation assigned to the decision value corresponding to the random value MR3. The pattern may be determined (selected) as the fluctuation pattern to be used this time. For example, when the random value MR3 is "140", the CPU 103 selects the variation pattern PA3-3.

  In the process of step S265 shown in FIG. 11, the lost fluctuation pattern prepared in advance corresponding to the normal state where the gaming state is the normal state and the case where the gaming state is the short state and the short time control is performed. The change pattern at the time of losing is determined using the determination table. For example, it is specified whether the time saving flag (the flag which is turned on in the time saving state) provided in the predetermined area (for example, the game control flag setting unit) of the RAM 102 is in the on state or not If the time is not short (when the time short flag is in the off state), the change pattern at the time of loss is determined using the loss change pattern determination table shown in FIG. 14 (A). On the other hand, when the time is short (when the time short flag is in the on state), the fluctuation pattern at the time of losing is determined using the lost fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 14B.

  In each lost fluctuation pattern determination table, a numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination may be allocated to the fluctuation pattern determination result according to the total number of pending storages. The total pending storage number may be specified from, for example, the total pending storage number count value which is the storage value of the total pending storage number counter, the total value of the first pending storage number count value and the second pending storage number count value, etc. .

  The CPU 103 determines whether the time is short or not, the total reserve memory number count value, and the numerical data indicating the random value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination read from the fluctuation random number buffer, and indicates normal time and time delay. By referring to any of the lost fluctuation pattern determination tables according to the total number of pending storages, when the time is not short, “0” to “1”, “2” to “4”, “5” to “8” The fluctuation pattern assigned to the decision value corresponding to the random value MR3 according to which of the following applies and which time it is during the time-saving, according to which of “0”, “1” and “2” to “8”. Is selected (selected) as the fluctuation pattern to be used this time.

  For example, when the time saving flag is on and the random number value MR3 is "229", the CPU 103 selects the variation pattern PA2-1 when the total pending storage count value is "0", and the total pending The variation pattern PB1-1 is selected when the storage number count value is “1”, and the variation pattern PB1-2 is selected when the total pending storage number count value is any of “3” to “8”.

  After executing any of the processes of steps S262 and S265 shown in FIG. 11, the CPU 103 sets a special figure fluctuation time which is a variable display time of the special symbol (step S266). Special figure fluctuation time that is the variable display time of the special symbol, from the start of the variation of the special symbol in the special figure game to the time it is derived derived display of the finalized special symbol that will be the variable display result It is. As shown in FIG. 12, the special figure fluctuation time is determined in advance corresponding to a plurality of fluctuation patterns prepared in advance. The CPU 103 can set the timing at which the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is derived by setting the special drawing fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern selected in the processing of steps S262 and S265.

  Following the process of step S266, CPU 103 performs a special figure game using the first special figure in first special symbol display device 4A and a special figure game using the second special figure in second special symbol display device 4B. In order to start one of the special drawing games in which the start condition is satisfied, the setting for starting the change of the special symbol is performed (step S 267). As an example, if the variation special figure designation buffer value is "1", the setting for transmitting the drive signal for updating the display of the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A is performed. On the other hand, if the variation special figure designation buffer value is "2", the setting for transmitting the drive signal for updating the display of the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B is performed. When the CPU 103 starts variable display using the first special view, the CPU 103 controls the first hold indicator 25A to display a display capable of identifying the number of the first special view hold storage subtracted by one. It is also possible to cause the hold indicator 25A to perform (for example, to decrease the number of lighted LEDs by one). When the CPU 103 starts variable display using the second special view, the CPU 103 controls the second hold indicator 25B to display the second special view which can be used to specify the second special view hold storage number subtracted by one. For example, the number of lighted LEDs may be reduced by one on the hold indicator 25B.

  After execution of the process of step S267, transmission setting of a command at the start of variation of the special symbol is performed (step S268). For example, when the fluctuation special drawing designation buffer value is “1”, the CPU 103 transmits a first symbol fluctuation start designation command, a fluctuation pattern command, a display result designation command to the effect control board 12 from the main board 11. Performs transmission settings to transmit pending storage count specification commands sequentially. On the other hand, when the variation special figure designation buffer value is “2”, the CPU 103 sends a second symbol variation start designation command, a variation pattern command, a display result designation command, and the second command to the effect control board 12 from the main board 11. Performs transmission settings to transmit pending storage count specification commands sequentially. The set command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the above-mentioned command control process after the special symbol process process is completed, for example. The first symbol variation start specification command and the second symbol variation start specification command here are transmitted as hold notification information specifying which of the first special view hold storage number and the second special view hold storage number decreased. Be done.

  After executing the process of step S268, the value of the special drawing process flag is updated to "2" (step S269), and then the variation pattern setting process is ended. When the value of the special view process flag is updated to "2" in step S269, the special symbol variation process of step S112 shown in FIG. 4 is executed when the next timer interrupt occurs.

  The special symbol variation process of step S112 in FIG. 4 is executed when the value of the special drawing process flag is "2". In this special symbol variation process, a process of varying a special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B, a process of measuring an elapsed time after the special symbol starts variation, and the like It is included. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the change of the special symbol reaches the special figure change time, the change of the special symbol is stopped in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B, and the special symbol is The fixed special symbol (fixed special symbol set in step S110) which is the result of variable display of the symbol is stopped and displayed (derived display), and the special symbol is displayed stopped when it is stopped and displayed (derived and displayed) The transmission setting of the symbol determination designating command, which is an effect control command for notifying the game), is also performed, and the value of the special drawing process flag is updated to “3”. The symbol determination designation command set for transmission is transmitted from the main substrate 11 to the effect control substrate 12 by, for example, executing the above-mentioned command control process after the special symbol process process is completed. By repeatedly executing step S112, variable display of the special symbol, derivation display of the determined special symbol, and the like are realized.

  The special symbol stopping process of step S113 in FIG. 4 is executed when the value of the special drawing process flag is "3". In the special symbol stop processing, processing to determine whether the big hit flag is in the ON state, and when the big hit flag is in the ON state, the time saving flag and the probability change flag are turned OFF, and the predetermined area of the RAM 102 (game control counter setting The count value of the time counter is set to “0” to count the remaining number of variable display to be executed during time reduction control provided in a section etc.), corresponding to the start of the big hit start production wait time (big hit gaming state It is a waiting time until execution of the presentation is started, and it is a predetermined time.), And the start of the jackpot designating the start of the jackpot gaming state based on that the special view display result is "big hit" A process of transmitting and setting a designated command (effect control command) and updating the special drawing process flag to "4" is included. Further, the special symbol stop process includes a process of updating the value of the special process process flag to "0" when the big hit flag is not in the on state.

  The command set for transmission is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the above-mentioned command control process after the special symbol process process is completed, for example.

  By these series of processing, when a big hit, the time saving state or the probability changing state ends once, and when losing, the remaining variable display that can be performed during the time saving is reduced by one. When the remaining variable display that can be performed during time saving becomes “0” times, the time saving flag is turned off, and the time saving state ends. That is, the time saving state (time saving control) is ended when the variable display is performed a predetermined number of times (the initial count value described below) which is determined in advance before the variable display result becomes "big hit" from the start. In addition, when there is a change in the gaming state, notification of the gaming state after the change is made to the effect control board 12 side.

  The big hit opening pre-processing of step S114 of FIG. 4 is executed when the value of the special processing process flag is “4”. The big hit opening pre-processing includes that the variable display result is "big hit" and that the round game start timing has come (for example, the big hit start presentation waiting time set in the above has elapsed). Based on etc., the process of starting the execution of the round game in the big hit gaming state and opening the big winning opening, the process of starting the measurement of the elapsed time from the opening state, and the like are included. In this process, for example, the big winning opening is opened corresponding to whether the big hit type is “non-probable variation” or “probable variation” (can be specified by the big-hit type buffer setting value stored in the big-hit type buffer) The upper limit of the period to be set may be set. As an example, in response to the jackpot type "non-probability" or "probability", by setting the upper limit of the period during which the big winning opening is opened to "29 seconds", a normal release round is performed do it. When the process of opening the special winning opening is performed, the value of the special processing process flag is updated to "5". By repeatedly performing step S114, standby until the start timing of the round game, opening of the big winning opening, and the like are realized.

  The big hit open processing of step S115 is executed when the value of the special processing process flag is “5”. The big hit opening process is based on the process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning opening, the elapsed time measured, the number of gaming balls detected by the count switch 23, etc. Processing to determine whether it is time to return from the open state to the closed state (or may be partially open), or the timing to return the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state A process of returning the special winning opening to a closed state when it is determined that the number has reached a predetermined number (for example, nine) or when the elapsed time reaches the upper limit period set in step S114. And the process of starting measurement of the elapsed time after returning to the closed state. When the special winning opening is returned to the closed state, the value of the special processing process flag is updated to "6". By repeatedly performing step S115, the opening state of the special winning opening is maintained until the timing of returning the special winning opening from the opening state to the closing state.

  The big hit opening post process of step S116 is executed when the value of the special processing process flag is "6". In this big hit opening post-processing, processing to determine whether the number of times of execution of the round game with the big winning opening opened has reached a predetermined upper limit, or when the upper limit is not reached It includes a process of measuring the elapsed time after returning to the closed state. Then, when the next round game is started, for example, when the measured elapsed time becomes the time when the next round game is started, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “4” (in this case) Is a control command to notify that the big hit gaming state has ended, for example, when the number of executions of the round game reaches the upper limit number of times, the big winning opening is immediately opened in the process of step S114. A setting is made to send a big hit end designation command, and the value of the special view process flag is updated to “7”. The command set for transmission is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the above-mentioned command control process after the special symbol process process is completed, for example. By repeatedly performing step S116, the process waits until the special winning opening is again opened.

  By repeatedly performing steps S114 to S116, a big hit gaming state is realized.

  The big hit end processing of step S117 is executed when the value of the special processing process flag is "7". In this big hit opening post-processing, processing to determine whether the number of times of execution of the round game with the big winning opening opened has reached a predetermined upper limit, or when the upper limit is not reached It includes a process of measuring the elapsed time after returning to the closed state. Then, when the next round game is started, for example, when the measured elapsed time becomes the time when the next round game is started, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “4” (in this case) Is a control command to notify that the big hit gaming state has ended, for example, when the number of executions of the round game reaches the upper limit number of times, the big winning opening is immediately opened in the process of step S114. A setting is made to send a big hit end designation command, and the value of the special view process flag is updated to “7”. The command set for transmission is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the above-mentioned command control process after the special symbol process process is completed, for example. By repeatedly performing step S116, the process waits until the special winning opening is again opened.

  It should be noted that the time saving state (time saving control) is ended only by the next big hit gaming state being started, of the variable display being executed a predetermined number of times and the next big hit gaming state being started. You may In this case, the setting of the initial count value and the time saving counter itself are unnecessary.

  Next, the main operation of the effect control board 12 will be described.

  In the effect control board 12, when the supply of the power supply voltage is received from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated to execute a predetermined effect control main process. When the effect control main process is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process to clear the RAM 122, set various initial values, and set CTC (counter / timer mounted on the effect control board 12) Perform register setting etc. of the circuit). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag provided in a predetermined area (for example, the effect control flag setting unit) of the RAM 122 is on. The timer interrupt flag is set to an on state each time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, the register setting of CTC. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off, the process waits.

  Further, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 occurs separately from the timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time has elapsed. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main substrate 11 is turned on. If an interrupt occurs because the effect control INT signal is turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt disable state, but interrupts using the CPU that does not automatically enter the interrupt disable state. It is desirable to issue a prohibited instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, a control signal to be an effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port that receives the control signal transmitted from the main substrate 11 via the relay substrate 15. The effect control command fetched at this time is stored, for example, in a effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122. Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 sets the interrupt permission and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

  If the timer interrupt flag is on, the timer interrupt flag is cleared to be in the off state, and command analysis processing is executed. In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main substrate 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control commands are read out. Corresponding settings and controls are performed.

  After executing the command analysis process, the effect control process process is executed. In the effect control process, various effects such as display operation of effect images in the display area of the image display device 5, sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, lighting operation of the light emitting body such as the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LED The control content of the rendering operation using the device is determined, determined, set, and the like according to the rendering control command or the like transmitted from the main substrate 11. Subsequent to the effect control process, the effect random number updating process is executed, and software is used to update numerical data indicating effect random numbers counted by the random counter of the RAM 122 as various random number values used for effect control.

  FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect control process. In the effect control process shown in FIG. 15, first, the effect control CPU 120 executes pre-reading processing for setting execution of pre-reading effect such as hold / active change effect or movable object effect (step S160).

  FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing an example of the pre-reading process performed in step S160 of FIG. As shown in FIG. 16, first, the effect control CPU 120 sends a start winning opening designation command (a first start winning opening designation command and a second start winning opening) to be transmitted in the start winning determination process of FIG. It is determined whether or not any of the designation commands), the display result designation command (any of the display result 1 designation command, the display result 2 designation command, and the display result 3 designation command) and the fluctuation category command have been input ( Step S600). The effect control CPU 120 can recognize the start winning by the start winning opening designation command. Further, the effect control CPU 120 can recognize whether the determination result at the time of winning corresponding to the start winning is a big hit or a loss by the display result designation command. Further, the effect control CPU 120 can recognize the fluctuation pattern (such as whether or not it is a super reach) of the variable display corresponding to the start winning by the fluctuation category command. Note that these commands may be stored in the start winning reception command buffer provided in the RAM 122.

  If the start winning combination designating command, the display result designating command, and the variation category command have not been input (step S600; No), the pre-reading process is ended. On the other hand, when the start winning opening designating command, the display result designating command, and the variation category command are input (step S600; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 sets the pending storage number count value indicating the special view pending storage number to 1 Increment (step S601). The pending storage count value is provided, for example, in the RAM 122. The pending storage number count value is incremented by 1 each time the first start winning opening designation command or the second starting winning opening designation command is input, and the first symbol variation start designation command or the second symbol variation start designation command is input. Decrease by one each time As a result, the pending storage count value indicates the current number of special map pending storages.

  After incrementing the hold storage count value by 1 (step S601), the CPU for effect control 120 performs pre-reading effect execution setting processing for setting execution of pre-reading effect such as hold / active change effect or movable object effect (step S602).

  FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing an example of the pre-reading effect execution setting process executed in step S602 of FIG. As shown in FIG. 17, first, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute pre-reading effect such as hold / active change effect and movable object effect (step S700). Specifically, in the process of step S700, the pre-reading effect execution determination table shown in FIG. 18 is referred to, and the presence or absence of pre-reading effect is determined. In addition, when the command at the time of starting winning a prize is missed or inconsistency occurs, the restriction on pre-reading effect is not performed until the variable display of the hold information corresponding to those commands is executed (digested) Be done. In addition, when the execution of the pre-reading effect is limited, the pre-reading effect of all aspects may not be performed for the pre-reading effect for the variable display corresponding to the start winning combination generated within the predetermined period, The pre-reading effect of some aspects may not be performed. Further, in this embodiment, when the pre-reading effect is already being executed, the process of executing the pre-reading effect on the other object is restricted until the variable display to be the advance notice ends. . Furthermore, during time saving control, it may be limited so that processing to execute pre-reading effect is not performed (pre-reading effect may be executed only in the normal state where time reducing control is not performed), During control, the pre-reading effect is executed based on the second start winning opening designating command (restricts the pre-reading effect for the winning to the first starting winning opening), and the first start in the case of a normal state where time saving control is not performed. The pre-reading effect may be executed based on the winning opening designating command (the pre-reading effect for the winning on the second start winning opening may be restricted). Further, for example, the execution of the pre-reading effect may be limited according to the number of pending storages, such as enabling the pre-reading effect to be executable only when the number of pending storages is two or more. In addition, when the pre-reading effect is executed when the number of pending storages is 1, a change in which the pending display of the notice object can be recognized (change to the special display mode displayed only when the pending / active change effect is performed) Each change such as the change of the display mode of the active display is performed for the player in an instant. Therefore, when the pre-reading effect is performed when the number of pending storages is 1, it may be performed only when the display mode with the highest degree of expectation is obtained, such as when the final color is "red". According to this, the player's attention can be drawn to the hold display and the active display.

  Also, the previous variation category command stored in the start winning reception command command buffer is checked to determine whether or not it is a variation category that can be executed with pre-reading effects, and it is determined that it is an execution category that can be executed. The pre-reading effect may be executable only when it is performed (if it is impossible, the pre-reading effect may be limited). For example, all variation categories specified by the variation category command received up to one before the latest variation category command and stored in the start-up winning time reception command buffer are read, and all the readings are “non-reach” In the case of designating a variation category corresponding to the variable display mode, it may be determined that the pre-reading effect is an executable variation category. According to this, in each variable display until variable display which is an object of advance is started, the pre-reading effect can be executed when all become the non-reach variable display mode. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the reach effect from being executed in the middle of the pre-reading effect and the continuity of the pre-reading effect being impaired.

  FIG. 18 is a diagram showing a configuration example of the pre-reading effect execution determination table. In the pre-read effect execution decision table shown in FIG. 18, when both hold / active change effect and movable object effect are executed, when only hold / active change effect is executed and movable object effect is not executed, hold / active change effect and In the case of executing only the movable body effect without executing the movable body effect (when the above executes the prefetch effect), in the case where neither the hold / active change effect nor the movable body effect is executed (when the prefetch effect is not performed) On the other hand, different determination rates are set depending on whether the winning determination result indicated by the display result designation command determined to be input in step S600 in FIG. 16 is a big hit or a loss. As illustrated, the execution ratio of the pre-reading effect differs according to the corresponding hold-time determination result of winning, and in the case of the big hit, the pre-reading effect is executed at a higher ratio than in the case of the loss. Further, even in the case where the pre-reading effect is executed, in the case of the big hit, the ratio in which both the hold / active change effect and the movable object effect are executed is high. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's sense of expectation that both the hold / active change presentation and the movable body presentation are performed. The pre-reading effect execution determination table shown in FIG. 18 is stored in, for example, the RAM 122. The effect control CPU 120 executes both the pending / active change effect and the movable object effect based on the pre-read effect execution determination table and the winning time determination result indicated by the display result designation command determined to be input in step S600. Whether or not to execute the movable body effect by executing only the suspension / active change effect, or to execute only the movable body effect without executing the suspension / active change effect and the movable body effect, or the suspension / active change effect and the movable body effect Decide if you do not want to do both. That is, in the process of step S700 of FIG. 17, when performing pre-reading effect with the presence or absence of pre-reading effect, whether to perform holding / active change effect, moving object effect or both, The kind of pre-reading effect is also decided at a stretch. It should be noted that, separately from this, it is determined in two stages that the type of pre-reading effect to be executed is further decided, if the pre-reading effect is determined to be performed first and then the pre-reading effect is determined to be performed. You may

  Returning to FIG. 17, the CPU 120 for effect control determines whether or not the determination in step S700 has decided to execute the hold / active change effect (step S701). If it is determined that the suspension / active change effect is not to be executed (step S701; No), the effect control CPU 120 ends the pre-reading effect execution setting process.

  When it is determined to execute the hold / active change effect (step S 701; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 refers to the final color determination table shown in FIG. 19 and finally changes the color (final color) Are determined (step S706). As described above, in this embodiment, in order to facilitate understanding, in the hold change effect, the advance notice object is made recognizable to the player (changed to the special display mode), and only in the active change effect. Although an example in which the display color changes is shown, for example, the display color may be changed stepwise in the hold change effect. Specifically, a plurality of hold / active change effect patterns may be prepared, and the display color may be changed each time the hold display is shifted. The pending / active change effect pattern has, for example, a third pending position (pending 3) indicating the number of pendings corresponding to the start winning from the oldest pending according to the number of pending storages (Hold 2), the mode of change in color and color of the hold display when it becomes the first (hold 1), and the active display when the variable display corresponding to the start winning becomes active (when active) It is only necessary to show the color and the aspect of the color change. In the process of step S706, the final display color including the case of stepwise change may be determined.

  FIG. 19 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of the final color determination table. In the final color determination table, final colors of “white”, “blue”, “green”, and “red” are set to be determined at different rates according to the variable display result. In the final color determination table in this embodiment, the ratio of the big hit when the final color is "red" is the highest, followed by "green", and then "blue" and "white" are the most successful. Rate is set low. In addition, in the case of "green" and "red", the determination ratio is set such that at least super reach is determined. As described above, in the case of the hold / active change effect in which the display color changes to green or red, since all the hold display and the active display being displayed may be enlarged, the enlarged display may be performed. In the variable display corresponding to the pending display to be the advance notice target, at least the notification of becoming the super reach is notified. Therefore, the player's expectation for the enlarged display can be improved.

  Returning to FIG. 17, after executing the process of step S706, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the final color determined in the process of step S706 is "green" or "red" (step S707). . If the final color is neither "green" nor "red", that is, "white" or "blue" (step S707; No), the CPU 120 for effect control controls all of the display including the hold display of the notice target. The enlargement mode setting for enlarging and displaying the hold display and the active display is determined as none (step S 708). As a result, in the on-hold / active change effect changing to “white” or “blue”, the enlarged display is not performed, and the small screen as the specific display area is not displayed in the image display device 5. After executing the process of step S 708, the CPU for effect control 120 ends the pre-reading effect execution setting process.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of step S 707 that the final color is “green” or “red” (step S 707), the effect control CPU 120 displays all the pending displays in the display including the pending display of the notice target. And the enlargement mode setting presence or absence which expands and displays an active display is determined with reference to the enlargement mode setting presence / absence determination table shown in FIG. 20 (step S709).

  FIG. 20 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of the enlargement mode setting presence / absence determination table. In the enlargement mode setting presence / absence determination table shown in FIG. 20, the display result designation command determined in step S600 in FIG. 16 is for the enlargement mode setting with enlargement and without the enlargement mode setting without enlargement. Different determination rates are set depending on whether the winning determination result shown is a big hit or a loss. As shown in the figure, the proportion determined to be with the enlargement mode setting to perform the enlargement display differs according to the corresponding hold winning time determination result, and in the case of the big hit, it is determined to be the enlargement mode setting than in the case of losing The proportion is high. Therefore, the player's expectation for the enlarged display can be improved.

  Returning to FIG. 17, after executing the process of step S709, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the enlargement mode setting is determined in step S709 (step S710). If it is determined that the enlargement mode is not set (Step S710; No), the CPU for effect control 120 ends the pre-reading effect execution setting process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the enlargement mode is set (step S710; Yes), the CPU 120 for effect control determines whether or not the movable object effect is determined in step S700, that is, hold / active change effect and movable It is determined whether it has been decided to perform both body effects (step S711). When the movable object effect is not performed, that is, when only the hold / active change effect is performed (step S711; No), the effect control CPU 120 turns on the enlargement flag indicating that only the hold / active change effect is performed to perform the enlarged display. (Step S712). The enlargement flag may be provided in the RAM 122. After executing the process of step S712, the effect control CPU 120 ends the pre-reading effect execution setting process.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the movable object effect is to be performed, that is, when both the suspension / active change effect for performing the enlarged display and the movable object effect are performed (step S711; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 performs the suspension for performing the enlarged display. An active change effect is executed, and further, a movable body effect is performed, that is, an overlapping flag indicating that the movable object effect to be executed is the above-described movable object special effect is set in the on state (step S713). The duplication flag may be provided in the RAM 122. After executing the process of step S 713, the CPU for effect control 120 ends the pre-reading effect execution setting process. Note that setting the overlap flag in the on state, that is, performing both the hold / active change presentation for performing enlarged display and the movable object presentation is also referred to as the specific condition being satisfied.

  Returning to FIG. 16, after executing the process of step S602, the effect control CPU 120 performs a process of adding a hold display or an active display (step S603). For example, when the number of pending storages is 1 and the condition for starting the special figure game is satisfied, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to add an active display to the active display area 5HA, and in the other cases, The effect control CPU 120 performs control to add a hold display according to the hold order to the start winning storage display area 5H. As described above, the condition for starting the special figure game is the first start condition for starting the special figure game using the first special figure and the first starting condition for starting the special figure game using the second special figure. There are 2 start conditions. For example, in the case where the special display game or the big hit game state of the previous time is ended and the variable display is not executed on the image display device 5 and the demonstration image etc. are displayed, the first start condition and the second start condition are satisfied. It becomes a state.

  Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 determines the content (displayed in gray as an initial state) of the hold display and the active display that the image display device 5 should display, and displays the content to the display control unit 123 according to the determination. Output control command. The display control unit 123 mounted on the effect control board 12 determines the control content of the display operation in the image display device 5 based on the display control command from the effect control CPU 120, generates image data, and the active display area 5HA The active display is displayed on the screen, and the hold display is displayed on the start winning storage display area 5H. After executing the process of step S603, the effect control CPU 120 ends the pre-reading process.

  Again referring back to FIG. After the prefetching process in step S160, the effect control CPU 120 responds to the value (initially "0") of the effect process flag provided in the predetermined area (for example, effect control flag setting unit) of the RAM 122. One of the processes in steps S170 to S177 is selected and executed.

  The variable display start waiting process of step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "0". This variable display start waiting process is based on whether or not the first symbol design variation start designation command or the second symbol variation start designation command has been received from the main substrate 11, the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 is performed. It includes a process of determining whether to start or not. When it is determined that the first symbol variation start designation command or the second symbol variation start designation command is received and it is determined that variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 is started, the value of the rendering process flag is updated to "1". Be done.

  The variable display start setting process of step S171 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "1". This variable display start setting process is a decorative symbol on image display device 5 in response to the start of variable display of the special symbol in the special drawing game by first special symbol display device 4A or second special symbol display device 4B. In order to perform the variable display of, the pre-reading effect set in the process of step S 602 in FIG. 16, and various other effect operations, the finalized decorative pattern or various types according to the variation pattern of the special symbol, the type of display result, etc. It includes the process of determining the effect control pattern. The variable display start setting process ends with the value of the effect process flag updated to “2”.

  The variable display effect process of step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In the variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 performs the effect control determined in step S 171 corresponding to the timer value in the effect control process timer provided in a predetermined area (for example, effect control timer setting unit) of the RAM 122 Various control data are read out from the pattern, and various effect control is performed during variable display of the decorative pattern.

  The process for waiting for a special figure in step S173 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "3." In the special-image-per-wait process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the hit start designation command transmitted from the main substrate 11 has been received. Then, when the hit start designation command is received, the hit start designation command designates the start of the big hit gaming state, and the big hit type specified by the display result designation command received before that is "probable". Alternatively, if "non-deterministic", the value of the rendering process flag is updated to "4". Further, when the effect control process timer times out without receiving the hit start designation command (when the hit start designation command reception waiting time has elapsed), it is determined that the special figure display result in the special figure game is "missing" Then, the value of the rendering process flag is updated to "0" which is the initial value.

  The special winning opening process at step S174 is normally performed when the value of the effect process flag is "4." In this large winning opening normal opening process, the CPU for effect control 120 sets, for example, a effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the effect contents in the big hit gaming state of “probable change” or “non-probable change”, and the effect image based on the set contents Are displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 or output of voices and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by the output of commands (sound effect signals) to the voice control board 13; Various effect control (big hit) occurred in big hit gaming state of "probable change" or "non-probable change", such as turning on / off / flashing game effect lamp 9 and decoration LED by the output of decoration signal), for example , And effect control to be notified in the image display device 5). In the special winning opening normal opening process, for example, the value of the effect control process flag is set to “5” corresponding to the ending effect process in response to the reception of the big hit end designation command from the main substrate 11. Update.

  The ending effect process of step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "5". In this ending effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the big hit gaming state, and displays an effect image based on the setting content in the display area of the image display device 5 or Output voice and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 13, and output a command (electric decoration signal) to the lamp control board 14 for the game effect lamp 9 or decoration Various effect control at the end of the big hit gaming state such as turning on / off / flashing the LED is executed. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "0" which is an initial value.

  FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S171 of FIG. 15 as the variable display start setting process. In the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 21, the effect control CPU 120 first determines, based on, for example, the display result designation command transmitted from the main board 11, whether the special view display result is "loss" or not. It determines (step S521). When it is determined that the special figure display result is "loss" (step S521; Yes), for example, the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern command transmitted from the main substrate 11 changes the display pattern of the decorative symbol It is determined whether it is the non-reach fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case of "non-reach" which is not considered as the reach mode (step S522).

  If it is determined in step S522 that the non-reach variation pattern is determined (step S522; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines a combination of finalized design symbols that will be the final stop design that constitutes the non-reach combination ( Step S523). As an example, in the process of step S523, first, the CPU 120 for effect control determines the left determined symbol updated by the random counter for effect provided in a predetermined area (for example, effect control counter setting unit) of the random number circuit 124 or the RAM 122 The numerical data indicating the random number value for the character is extracted, and by referring to the left fixed symbol determination table stored and prepared in advance in the ROM 121, etc., “left” in the display area of the image display device 5 in the fixed decoration symbol The left determined decorative symbol to be displayed stopped in the decorative symbol display area 5L is determined. Next, the numerical data indicating the right determined symbol determination random number value updated by the random number circuit 124 or the effect random counter or the like is extracted, and the right determined symbol determination table stored and prepared in the ROM 121 is referred to Thus, the finalized decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed on the "right" decorative symbol display area 5R in the display area of the image display device 5 among the finalized decorative symbols is determined. At this time, the symbol number of the right determined decorative symbol may be determined to be different from the symbol number of the left determined decorative symbol by setting in the right determined symbol determination table or the like. Subsequently, numerical value data indicating a random value for determining the middle fixed symbol determined to be updated by the random number circuit 124 or the random counter for effect is extracted, and the middle fixed symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 is referred to Thus, the finalized decorative symbol to be displayed in the stop display on the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C in the display area of the image display device 5 in the finalized decorative symbol is determined.

  If it is determined in step S522 that the pattern is not the non-reach variation pattern (step S522; No), the combination of the finalized design symbols to be the final stop symbols constituting the reach combination is determined (step S524). As an example, in the process of step S524, first, numerical data indicating the random value for determining the left and right fixed symbol determined updated by the random number circuit 124 or the random counter for effect is extracted, and the left and right stored in advance in the ROM 121 By referring to the finalized symbol determination table or the like, symbol numbers of the finalized symbol in the display area of the image display device 5 in the left and the right represent the symbol numbers displayed on the left and the right in the symbol display areas 5L and 5R. Determine the same decorative pattern. Furthermore, numerical data indicating a random value for determining the middle fixed symbol determined to be updated by the random number circuit 124 or the random counter for effect is extracted, and the middle fixed symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 is referred to Thus, the finalized decorative symbol to be displayed stopped in the decorative symbol display area 5C of "middle" in the display area of the image display device 5 in the finalized decorative symbol is determined. Here, for example, when the determined decoration pattern becomes a big hit combination, as in the case where the symbol number of the middle determined decoration symbol becomes identical to the symbol number of the left determined decoration symbol and the right determined decoration symbol, an arbitrary value By adding or subtracting (for example, “1”) to the symbol number of the middle fixed decoration symbol, etc., the fixed decoration symbol may be a reach combination without being a big hit combination. Alternatively, when the middle fixed decoration pattern is determined, the difference between the left fixed decoration pattern and the right fixed decoration pattern with the pattern number (pattern difference) may be determined, and the middle fixed decoration pattern corresponding to the design difference may be set. .

  When it is determined in step S521 that the special view display result is not "losing" (step S521; No), the CPU for effect control 120 determines the combination of the finalized decorative symbol that will be the final stop symbol constituting the big hit combination. (Step S527). As an example, in the process of step S527, first, numerical data indicating a random number value for jackpot determination symbol determination updated by the random number circuit 124 or the effect random counter or the like is extracted. Subsequently, the “left”, “middle” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5 L in the display region of the image display device 5 are referred to by referring to the big hit finalized symbol determination table stored and prepared in advance in the ROM 121. 5C and 5R are fixed and the symbol numbers displayed stopped are determined the same decorative pattern. At this time, for example, the same decorative pattern is determined according to the jackpot type specified by the display result specification command or the like.

  The information of the mode and stop order of the left fixed decoration pattern, the right fixed decoration pattern, and the middle fixed decoration pattern set in steps S523, S524, and S527 is stored, for example, in the RAM 122.

  After executing any of the processes of steps S523, S524, and S527, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the overlap flag is set to the on state (step S528). As described above, the overlap flag is a flag indicating that the suspension / active change effect for performing enlarged display is performed and the movable object effect is further performed, and is set to the on state in the process of step S 712 in FIG. . When it is determined that the overlap flag is set to the on state (step S528; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 performs the effect on the small screen as the specific display area displayed on the image display device 5 as the movable object effect. A movable body special effect setting process is performed to perform setting for executing a movable body special effect displaying an image (step S529). Specifically, in the process of step S529, the movable body 99 is caused to rotate for 2 seconds from the start of each variable display in a plurality of variable displays until the variable display of the hold of the advance notice is performed. In addition, a setting is made to display the effect image on a small screen as a specific display area. After executing the process of step S529, the effect control CPU 120 performs a hold / active change effect execution setting process for setting for executing the hold / active change effect (step S530). In the process of step S530, the setting is made to expand and display all the pending display and the active display being displayed including the pending display of the advance notice target, and the operation effect is performed at the timing when the pending display to be made advance notice shifts first. Furthermore, at the timing shifted to the active display area 5HA, setting is performed to change the display color of the active display by performing an operation effect. Further, in the process of step S530, a small screen as a specific display area is displayed on the image display device 5, and an image displayed in the hold / active change presentation (for example, hold display or active display, character image in action presentation, etc.) In addition to the setting for performing all the displays other than the small screen in the small screen, the display on the small screen as the specific display area is ended after the end of the hold / active change effect, and the setting for returning to the original state is performed. The process of step S529 may be performed after the process of step S530.

  When it is determined in step S528 that the overlap flag is in the off state (step S528; No), the CPU 120 for effect control determines whether or not to execute the movable object effect (step S531). When the movable body effect is to be executed (step S531; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 performs movable body effect setting processing for executing the movable body effect (step S532). Specifically, in the process of step S532, the movable body 99 is caused to rotate for 2 seconds from the start of each variable display in a plurality of variable displays until the variable display of the hold of the advance notice is performed. At the same time, a setting for displaying an effect image in the vicinity of the movable body 99 in the image display device 5 is performed.

  After executing the process of step S532, or when it is determined that the movable object effect is not performed in step S531 (step S531; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the suspension / active change effect. (Step S533). If it is determined that the hold / active change effect is to be executed (step S533; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 sets the hold / active change effect execution for executing the hold / active change effect according to the setting status of the enlargement flag. A process is performed (step S534). As described above, the enlargement flag is set to the on state in step S712 in FIG. In the process of step S534, when the enlargement flag is set to the on state, the setting for enlarging all the displayed pending and active displays including the pending display of the notice target is performed, and the notice becomes a notice target. The effect presentation is performed at the timing when the hold display is shifted first, and the display color of the active display is changed at the timing when the shift is made to the active display area 5HA. On the other hand, in the case where the enlargement flag is not set to the on state and is in the off state, the setting and the effect presentation for enlarging all the suspension display and the active display in display including the suspension display of the notice target are not performed. The display mode is changed so that the notice object can be recognized at the timing when the hold indication to be the notice object is first shifted, and the display color of the active indication is changed at the timing when shifted to the active display area 5HA. Set only the setting to be changed).

  After executing the process of step S530 or step S534, or when it is determined in step S533 that the suspension / active change effect is not to be executed (step S533; No), the effect control CPU 120 executes the other effect. The effect pattern setting process is performed (step S535).

  Subsequently, based on the content set in the process of steps S528 to S534 and the effect pattern set in the process of step S529, the effect control CPU 120 produces a production control pattern to be a usage pattern to be used later, It selects from among a plurality of patterns prepared in advance (step S536).

  Subsequently, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an initial value of the effect control process timer provided in a predetermined area (such as the effect control timer setting unit) of the RAM 122 corresponding to the change pattern designated by the change pattern command. (Step S537).

  Then, the effect control CPU 120 performs setting for starting the change of the decorative symbol or the like in the image display device 5 (step S538). At this time, for example, the display control instruction specified by the display control data included in the effect control pattern determined as the usage pattern in step S536 is transmitted to the VDP of the display control unit 123 or the like, and the like. It is sufficient to start the variation of the decorative symbol in the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R provided in the display region of the above.

  Further, the effect control CPU 120 performs setting for updating the hold display in the start winning storage display area 5H and the active display in the active display area 5HA in response to the variable display being started (step S539). Here, when the hold display is displayed in the start winning storage display area 5H, the effect control CPU 120 erases the hold display corresponding to the hold order 1 and moves the remaining hold displays one by one (shift ). On the other hand, when the hold display is not displayed in the start winning storage display area 5H and only the active display in the active display area 5HA is displayed, the effect control CPU 120 does not update the display.

  Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect process flag to “2” which is a value corresponding to the variable display effect process (step S540), and ends the variable display start setting process.

  FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S172 of FIG. 15 as the variable-display effect process. In the variable display effect process shown in FIG. 22, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the variable display time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern has elapsed based on, for example, the effect control process timer value (step S801). ). As an example, in the process of step S 541, when the effect control process timer value is updated (for example, 1 subtracted) and the end code is read from the effect control pattern corresponding to the updated effect control process timer value, etc. It may be determined that the variable display time has elapsed.

  When the variable display time has not elapsed in step S541 (step S801; No), the CPU 120 for effect control determines whether or not it is a movable body effect execution period for executing the movable body effect ( Step S802). The movable body effect execution period is set in step S529 or step S532 shown in FIG. If it is determined that the movable object effect execution period is in progress (step S802; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the overlap flag is set to the on state (step S803). When the overlap flag is set to the on state (step S 803; Yes), the movable body 99 is rotationally operated, and the movable body special effect is to display the effect image on the small screen as the specific display area in accordance with the rotational operation. Control is performed (step S805). On the other hand, when the overlap flag is off (step S 803; No), the movable body 99 is rotationally operated, and a movable body effect control is performed to display an effect image in the vicinity of the movable body 99 in the image display device 5 according to the rotational operation. (Step S804).

  After performing the processing of step S805 or step S804, or when it is determined in step S802 that it is not the movable object effect execution period (step S803; No), the effect control CPU 120 executes hold / active change effect It is determined whether or not it is a holding / active change presentation execution period of (step S806). The suspension / active change presentation execution period is set in step S530 or step S534 shown in FIG. If it is determined that the hold / active change effect execution period is in progress (step S806; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 executes the hold / active change effect according to the contents set in step S530 or step S534 of FIG. (Step S807). Specifically, in the process of step S 807, when the enlargement mode setting for performing the enlargement display is performed, the enlargement control for enlarging and displaying all the suspension display and the active display in display including the suspension display of the notice target is performed. While performing, it displays the character for performing the operation effect, controls to change the display mode of the hold display and the active display, and performs display other than the display regarding the hold / active change effect in the small screen as the specific display area Control is performed. Specifically, in the small screen as the specific display area, all displays other than the display related to the hold / active change effect such as background image and variable display, and notice effects other than the hold / active change effect are performed. On the other hand, when the enlargement mode setting for performing the enlargement display is not performed, the enlargement control is not performed, and the control for changing the display mode of the hold display and the active display is performed without executing the operation effect.

  After executing the processing of step S 807, or when it is determined in step S 806 that the suspension / active change presentation execution period is not in progress (step S 806; No), the CPU 120 for production control sets the overlapping flag or the enlargement flag in the on state. It is determined whether it is set (step S808). If it is determined that the overlap flag or the enlargement flag is set to the on state (S 808; Yes), it is determined whether the hold / active change presentation execution period has ended (step S 809). If the hold / active change effect execution period has ended (step S809; Yes), the display control by the small screen as the special area, that is, the specific display area control is ended, and the display is returned to the original state (step S810). After executing the process of step S810, the effect control CPU 120 clears the flag set in the on state in the overlap flag or the enlargement flag to the off state (step S811).

  After executing the processing of step S811, if it is determined in step S808 that both the overlap flag and the expansion flag are off (step S808; No), or the suspension / active change effect execution period has not ended in step S809 When it determines with (step S809; No), CPU120 for production control decides whether or not it is the reach production execution period in order to execute reach production (step S812). The reach effect execution period may be determined in advance in the effect control pattern selected corresponding to the predetermined reach effect. If it is determined in step S812 that the reach effect execution period is reached (step S812; Yes), effect operation control for executing the reach effect is performed (step S813).

  When the reach effect execution period is not reached in step S812 (step S812; No), or after the process of step S813 is performed, for example, based on the setting in the special figure fluctuation effect control pattern corresponding to the fluctuation pattern, etc. After the effect operation control including the variable display operation of the decorative pattern is performed (step S 814), the variable display effect process is ended. When the small screen as the specific display area is displayed, the effect performed in step S814 is performed on the small screen. Whether the small screen display is being performed may be determined, for example, by referring to the state of the small screen display flag provided in the RAM 122. The small screen display flag may be set to the on state when the small screen display is performed in the process of step S 807, and may be cleared to the off state in the process of step S 810.

  If the variable display time has elapsed in step S801 (step S801; Yes), it is determined whether or not the symbol determination command transmitted from the main substrate 11 has been received (step S815). At this time, if the symbol determination command is not received (step S815; No), the variable display effect processing is ended and the process waits. In addition, after the variable display time elapses, when the predetermined time elapses without receiving the symbol determination command, a predetermined error processing is executed in response to the failure to receive the symbol determination command normally. You may

  When the symbol determination command is received in step S815 (step S815; Yes), for example, in the variable display of the decorative symbol such as transmitting a predetermined display control command to the VDP of the display control unit 123 or the like. Control is performed to derive and display the final stop symbol (decided decorative symbol) to be the display result (step S816). Subsequently, a predetermined time determined in advance as a hit start designation command reception waiting time is set (step S 817), and the value of the rendering process flag is updated to “3” which is a value corresponding to waiting processing Step S818), the variable display effect processing ends.

  Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 23 and FIG. 25, effects in the case where the hold / active change effect for performing the enlarged display and the movable object effect (the movable object effect executed here becomes the movable object special effect) are performed. The operation will be described. FIG. 23 is a timing chart when hold / active change effect and movable body effect are performed (more specifically, timing when hold / active change effect for performing enlarged display and movable body special effect is performed). Is a chart). FIG. 25 is a diagram showing an example of the rendering operation of the suspension / active change production and the movable body effect (more specifically, the rendering operation in the case of performing the suspension / active change rendering for performing the enlarged display and the movable body special performance An example is shown). In the example shown in the figure, the third variable display is a variable display of a preview target effect preview object, the variable display target notice object is referred to as target change, and the preview target target hold display is referred to as target hold.

  First, when the first variable display is started (transition from FIG. 25 (A) to FIG. 25 (B)), the hold / active change effect is executed, and all the hold display and active display being displayed are enlarged. (The hold display of the start winning storage display area 5H shown in FIG. 25A and the active display of the active display area 5HA are displayed on the hold display of the start winning storage display area 5H shown in FIG. 25B. Is displayed on the active display of). In addition, it may be made to change into a star shape (special mode) in connection with background switching without performing effect presentation. Moreover, you may change the display mode of a pending | holding display by performing the effect presentation of a different aspect by the case shown to FIG. 25 (B) and FIG. 25 (F). The example shown in the drawing shows an example in which the entire active display area 5HA (both the active display AH and the pedestal display AHA) is enlarged. Further, the display mode of the hold display of the notice target is changed into a star (special mode) so that the player can recognize which hold display is the hold display of the notice target (see FIG. 25B). Indication Pending HG). At the same time, a small screen as a specific display area is displayed (small screen 6DP shown in FIG. 25B). At the same time, as the movable body effect, the movable body 99 is rotationally operated for 2 seconds from the start of variable display, and the movable body special effect in which the effect image (effect image 44 shown in FIG. 25B) is displayed on the small screen Is executed (FIG. 25 (B)). In addition, the background image and the decorative design are reduced and displayed on the small screen (the background image 66 shown in FIG. 25A or the background image 66 where the decorative designs 5L, 5C, and 5R show in FIG. 25B, the decorative design It is displayed in reduced size as 5L, 5C, 5R). In addition, as shown in the figure, once the hold / active change effect for performing the enlarged display is executed, the small screen as the specific display area should continue to be displayed at least for a period until the hold / active change effect is finished. It becomes.

  When the first variable display is ended (FIG. 25C) and the second variable display is started, the movable body 99 is rotated for 2 seconds from the start of the variable display, and the movable body special effect is displayed. It is executed (FIG. 25D). When the target change is started, the movable body 99 is rotated for 2 seconds from the start of the target change, the special effect of the movable body is executed, and the action effect is performed on the active display (FIG. F)). Subsequently, when the movable object special effect ends, the display color of the active display changes to the final color determined in step S706 of FIG. 17 as a result of the action effect (active display of special mode shown in FIG. 25F) The 5HG aspect changes to the active indication 5HK aspect). In the illustrated example, an example in which the color has changed to red is shown (FIG. 25G). When the hold / active change effect is finished, the enlarged display is finished according to the end (The hold display of the start winning memory display area 5H and the active display of the active display area 5HA as shown in FIG. 25 (H) Is also displayed in its original size). Thereafter, the specific display area is not displayed and the control by the small screen is ended, and the original display (the decorative symbols 5L, 5C, 5R are also displayed in the original size, and the background image 66 is also displayed in the original size) (FIG. 25 (H)). Then, a rendering operation such as reach production is performed. As shown in FIG. 23, the on-hold / active change effect in this embodiment ends after the movable object effect (in this case, the movable object special effect) is ended. Further, the small screen as the specific display area is erased after the end of the hold / active change presentation. Therefore, the end timing of the effect becomes clear, and the effect can be enhanced. In addition, it is possible to reduce (prevent) discomfort caused by ending when the movable body effect is halfway. In addition, as shown in FIG. 25, on the small screen as a specific display area, display related to the hold / active change effect such as variable display of background image or decorative pattern, effect image, etc. (for example, character in hold display or active display, action effect Display other than the image etc.) is performed, and no hold display or active display is performed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a sense of incongruity which is given by displaying corresponding displays corresponding to variable displays such as a hold display and an active display in a plurality of display areas.

  FIG. 24 is a diagram showing an example of a rendering operation of a movable body effect, and more specifically, a diagram showing an example of a rendering operation when only a movable body effect is performed as a prefetch effect. As described above, in the movable body effect, a special movable body effect for displaying an effect image for effectively making the movable body 99 operate is displayed on a small screen as a specific display area, and the effect Since a (normal) movable body effect that displays an image near the movable body 99 in the image display device 5 can be performed, the difference will be described. As shown in FIG. 24A, the third hold display is stored during variable display (three hold displays are displayed in the start winning memory display area 5H shown in FIG. 24A), and the active display area 5HA is displayed. An active display AH and a pedestal display AHA are displayed on the), and the case where the hold is determined as the target hold will be described as an example. As shown in FIG. 24 (B), when the variable display under execution is finished and the next variable display is started, as shown in FIG. 24 (C), the movable body effect for 2 seconds from the start of the variable display As the movable body 99 rotates, the effect image (the effect image 44 shown in FIG. 24C) is displayed. In this case, since the enlarged display is not performed, the effect image is different from FIG. 25B, FIG. 25D, FIG. It is displayed in the vicinity (the effect image 44 is displayed in the vicinity of the movable body 99 as shown in FIG. 24C). Also, unlike FIG. 25 (B) etc., the background image (background image 66 shown in FIG. 24 (A)) and the decorative design (decorative design 5L, 5C, 5R shown in FIG. 24 (A)) Displayed and not displayed on a small screen. When two seconds have passed since the start of the variable display, the movable body effect is ended, and the rotation operation of the movable body 99 is stopped and the effect image is also erased. Thereafter, the movable object presentation is executed at each fluctuation until the fluctuation (target fluctuation) corresponding to the target suspension is started (including the target fluctuation).

  In addition, as in the movable body effect in FIG. 24 and FIG. 25, when executing the movable body effect a plurality of times before the target change, the speed of the rotation operation in each time is gradually increased or the color of the effect image is You may change it. In this case, the effect image of the final color in the hold / active change presentation may be displayed in the final stage of the movable object presentation. According to this, it is possible to maintain a sense of unity in the effects and to improve the game interest. The movable body 99 may be provided with an LED or a lamp, and may be lighted or blinked in various colors according to the rotation operation. For example, the movable body 99 may be provided with an LED, and light may be emitted in a color according to the degree of expectation and may be rotated (that is, the movable body effect may be performed in a different manner according to the degree of expectation). Then, the color of the effect image displayed as the effect auxiliary display may be set as the color according to the light emission color of the LED. According to this, the rendering effect can be improved. In addition, the execution pattern of the presentation assistance display can be diversified, and the decline in the game entertainment can be prevented. Furthermore, in the movable body effect, the operation sound may be output in accordance with the rotation operation of the movable body 99. In this case, even if the movable object effect being executed is a small-screen effect as a specific display area, or different speakers depending on whether the effect image is displayed on a small screen as a specific display area or a normal movable object effect. Good. For example, in the normal movable body effect, while the operation sound is output by the speaker 8L and the speaker 8R, in the movable body special effect, the speaker on the side where the specific display area is displayed (in the example shown in FIG. 25) Since the small screen as the specific display area is displayed on the left side of the image display device, the operation sound may be output only from the speaker 8L). In addition, during the period when the small screen as the specific display area is displayed (that is, the period when the hold / active change effect is being executed), all the audio output related to the display performed on the small screen as the specific display area is It may be made to output only from the speaker by which the specific display area is displayed. According to this, the rendering effect can be enhanced.

  As described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the following effects can be achieved.

  The effect control CPU 120 can execute two types of effects such as hold / active change effect and movable object effect as prefetch effect. Then, when executing both hold / active change effect and movable object effect, the effect image is displayed on the small screen as the specific display area displayed on the image display device 5, and the movable body is different from the normal mode. It is possible to carry out an effect. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the amusement of the game due to a decrease in the visibility of the effect.

  When the effect control CPU 120 executes both the hold / active change effect and the movable object effect, the effect image is displayed on the small screen as the specific display area displayed on the image display device 5 to obtain the movable object effect. Informing the player that is being executed. Therefore, it is possible to easily recognize that the movable object effect is being performed, and to improve the game interest. Further, the effect control CPU 120 can execute, as a hold / active change effect, a hold / active change effect for performing enlarged display. Therefore, it can be easily recognized that the display mode changes as the hold / active change effect, and the game interest can be improved.

  The effect control CPU 120 causes the movable body 99 to rotate as movable object effect, and displays an effect image as an effect auxiliary display so as to effectively highlight that the movable body 99 is operating. Then, when performing only the movable body effect, the effect image is displayed in the vicinity of the movable body 99 in the image display device 5, while both the hold / active change effect and the movable body effect are performed. The effect image is displayed on a small screen as a specific display area. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately perform the presentation support display, and the game interest can be improved.

  Further, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the hold / active change effect for performing the enlarged display, the display (background, etc., for example, the hold display or the active display, the character image in the action effect, etc.) relating to the hold / active change effect. All display of images and decorative patterns, effect images, etc.) is performed on a small screen as a specific display area, and no on-hold display or active display is displayed on a small screen. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a sense of incongruity which is given by displaying corresponding displays corresponding to variable displays such as a hold display and an active display in a plurality of display areas. In addition, the CPU for effect control may perform all display other than display related to hold / active change effect such as background image or variable display, and notice effect other than hold / active change effect on the small screen as a specific display area. It is possible. Therefore, the visibility of the effect is improved, and the effect of the effect can be improved, and the game interest can be improved.

  Further, the effect control CPU 120 ends the hold / active change effect after the movable object effect is ended, and after the hold / active change effect is ended, the small screen as the specific display area is not displayed and the control by the small screen is ended. . Therefore, the end timing of the effect becomes clear, and the effect can be enhanced. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 changes the state to enable the player to recognize in the pending / active change effect, which pending object is the preview object of the pre-reading effect. That is, the display mode is changed to a specific display mode when the hold / active change effect is performed. Therefore, the target on which the on-hold / active change presentation is performed becomes clear, and the presentation effect can be improved.

  Further, the CPU for effect control 120 can execute the movable object effect according to the degree of expectation, and displays an effect image as an effect auxiliary display in the movable object effect. Then, in the case where the suspension / active change effect of performing the enlarged display is further performed (when the specific condition of performing both the suspension / active change effect of performing the enlarged display and the movable object effect is satisfied), the effect image is displayed. It is possible to display at a different position as compared with the case where the suspension / active change effect for performing the enlarged display is not performed (when the specific condition is not satisfied). Therefore, it is possible to diversify the execution pattern of the presentation assistance display, and to prevent the decrease in the game entertainment. More specifically, when the suspension / active change effect for performing enlarged display is performed, the effect control CPU 120 executes the movable object special effect as the movable object effect, thereby effecting the effect image on the small screen as the specific display area. indicate. Therefore, it can be easily recognized that the specific condition can be established, and the game interest can be improved.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, on the screen of the image display device 5, the active display area 5HA is arranged in proximity to the start winning storage display area 5H, and the active display is displayed in proximity to the hold display. As a result, when the hold display is erased, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the active display.

  The present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible. For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 does not have to have all the technical features shown in the above-described embodiment, and one of the embodiments described above can solve at least one problem in the prior art. It may have a configuration of part. Further, at least a part of each of the following modifications may be combined.

  In the above embodiment, in the hold / active change effect for performing the enlarged display, it is possible to recognize which hold the variable display that is the advance notice target is by performing the action effect (the hold / active change effect is performed This is an example, although an example (see FIG. 25B) in which the special display mode is displayed only in the case is shown. For example, the effect presentation may be performed only when changing the display mode of the active display, or may not be performed when the special display mode is selected. Note that the timing at which the special display mode is changed may be the timing at which the suspension / active change effect is started, or the timing at which the suspension (target suspension) corresponding to the variable display of the advance notice object is shifted The timing of the shift may be determined. Further, in the above embodiment, an example is shown in which the enlarged display may not be performed when executing the hold / active change effect in which the display mode of the active display changes to “green” or “red”. When executing a hold / active change effect in which the display mode of the active display changes to “green” or “red”, 100% enlarged display may be performed. In addition, even when holding / active change presentation is performed in which the display mode of the active display is changed to “white” or “blue”, enlarged display may be performed. Further, in the above embodiment, an example is shown where the target of the enlarged display is all the held display and the active display itself when enlarged and displayed in the hold / active change effect, but in addition to this, the held display The display unit for active display and a display area (for example, a pedestal display or a part divided into areas) may be enlarged and displayed.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the pending / active change presentation and the movable object presentation are performed as the pre-reading effect, and the pending / active change presentation and the movable subject presentation to perform the enlarged display are performed in the same period. Although the example which makes the execution aspect of movable body presentation different (it performs movable body special presentation) was shown, this is an example. The said conditions are not restricted to two types of effects performed as pre-reading effects being performed in the same period. For example, the notice effect for the variation performed during the variable display is performed in the same period during the display, such as a notice by the character, a notice by using characters, a notice by using characters and telops, a notice of background change to change the background mode, etc. It is sufficient if two types of effects performed in any state are performed in the same period, such as the effect performed in the same period, and if one of the effects is performed, the other effect is difficult to see For example, the type of effect may be any effect. In addition, one of the effects may be preview effect and the other effect may be preview effect for the change performed during the variable display. Moreover, the effects performed in the same period are not limited to two types, and may be three or more types. In this case, the specific display area may be further displayed. Moreover, when three or more types of effects are performed in the same period, a plurality of effects may be performed on the small screen as the specific display area. In addition, by displaying a simulated linked chance symbol that is a simulated linked chance on the small screen as the specific display area, the enlargement control may be performed over a plurality of fluctuations in the fluctuation. In the above embodiment, the specific display area is displayed in the image display device 5. However, in the gaming machine or the like provided with the sub liquid crystal in addition to the image display device 5, the specific display area is displayed. The display performed on the small screen as the specific display area may be performed on the sub liquid crystal. In the above embodiment, on the condition that the suspension / active change presentation and the movable object presentation are performed in the same period, the mode of execution of the movable object presentation is made different, and the suspension display and the active display are displayed preferentially. In the example shown in, on the contrary, the movable object presentation may be prioritized. Specifically, it is possible to execute an advance notice effect to operate the movable body 99 to fill the screen of the image display device 5, and in that case, a hold display or an active display may be displayed on a small screen as a specific display area. .

  Further, in the above embodiment, an example in which the various images displayed on the small screen have the same ratio as the image displayed on the image display device 5, that is, the screen size of the image display device 5 is 10 If the screen size of the small screen is 1, an example in which the image displayed on the small screen has a ratio of 1/10 of the size displayed on the image display device 5 has been shown, but this is an example. is there. As described above, in the small screen as the specific display area, all displays other than the image displayed in the hold / active change effect such as the hold display or the active display, the character image in the action effect, etc. are performed. Among them, when performing effects requiring the player's operation, such as button effects, etc., only the image prompting the operation (promotion display) should not be reduced at the same ratio as the image displayed on the image display device 5 (The small screen may be reduced to one tenth, and the button display as the prompt may be reduced to two tenths). According to this, it is possible to prevent the player from missing the promotion display. Further, during the display of the small screen as the specific display area, the execution of effects requiring the player's operation such as button effects may be prohibited. According to this, it is possible to draw the attention of the player to the hold / active change presentation. The button effect to be executed after the end of the hold / active change effect may be executable.

  Further, in the above embodiment, when the hold / active change effect for performing the enlarged display is executed, the effect effect is executed, and the display mode of the active display is a display with a relatively high expectation such as “green” or “red”. Although the example which changes to an aspect was shown, this is an example. For example, the effect presentation for changing the active display may include success presentation and failure presentation. Specifically, when the success effect is performed, the display mode of the active display changes from the special display mode to "green" or "red", while when the failure effect is performed, the special display mode To the normal mode, which is "gray". In addition, when a failure rendition is performed, the display mode may be changed to the display mode of “white” or “blue” instead of the normal mode.

  In the above embodiment, in order to facilitate understanding, in the hold change effect, the player can recognize the advance notice object (change to the special display mode), and the display color changes only in the active change effect. Although shown, the display color may be changed in the hold change effect. Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, an example is shown in which the effect presentation is not performed in the suspension / active change presentation in which the enlarged display is not performed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, by performing the on-hold change presentation as shown in FIG. 26, the operation regarding the variable display corresponding to the on-hold display may be notified. In the example shown in the drawing, the case is described in which the on-hold change effect as the on-hold / active change effect without enlargement display is executed as an example, but in the on-hold change effect as on-hold / active change effect in which the enlarged display is performed Is also applicable.

  FIG. 26 is a diagram showing an example of the effect operation of the on-hold change effect. The on-hold change effect shown in the figure is whether or not the color of the on-target display changes when the color ball thrown away toward one of the on-hold displays collides with the target's on-hold display (that is, acts). It is a production that shows The setting here is based on the premise that the color ball must always hit the target holding display, and the player is entertained with an effect of whether or not the ball is broken. Of course, it may be set so that an effect may be generated such that the thrown ball does not collide with the object's hold display. If the ball splits beautifully and the color of the pending display changes, the rendering result is successful, and if the color of the pending display does not change without breaking the ball, it is a failure. When it succeeds, the degree of expectation that the pending display is a big hit is higher than when it fails. It is also referred to as "updating" that the color of the reserved display changes to a color with high expectation such as a big hit.

  The on-hold change effect shown in the figure has one feature in that the speed of the color ball thrown off toward one of the on-hold indications is decelerated halfway. In particular, the length of the deceleration period is not uniform, and is determined from at least two types, and the possibility that the rendering result will be successful is higher when the deceleration period is longer than when the deceleration period is short. However, regardless of which deceleration period is selected, the timing at which the ball starts to decelerate after being thrown is common.

  Various images are displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 during the variable display of the decorative design indicated by the three downward arrows. At the lower end, the image TH or H displaying the generated pending storage information is displayed corresponding to the number of pending storage information (hereinafter referred to as a pending storage image or a pending display). In these pending displays, the pending storage image may be displayed in a form in which the first pending storage number and the second pending storage number are distinguished. In the active display area 5HA at the lower left of the screen, a position display AHA (base display AHA) indicating a display position of the active display is displayed. An active display AH is displayed above the pedestal display AHA. In addition, when performing as suspension change production in suspension / active change production which performs enlarged display, as the variable display of the decorative symbol shown by the downward three arrows in the example shown in the figure is shown in the above-mentioned embodiment, it is specific It may be performed on a small screen as a display area. In this case, the hold display and the active display shown in FIG. 26 may be enlarged and displayed (in the example shown, the movable body 99 is omitted).

  Referring to FIG. 26A, a character 930 having a color ball 931 appears during variable display of the decorative design. The appearance timing of the character 930 can be set variously. However, it is necessary to prevent the holding display from being wasted by shifting the hold display during the effect period between the appearance of the character 930 and the outcome of success or failure of the effect. Therefore, the character 930 is made to appear at a stage where the remaining period of the variable display is sufficiently longer than the rendering period.

  The character 930 throws the color ball 931 toward the second hold display TH from the left of the four hold displays appearing on the screen. The time from when the character 930 throws the color ball 931 until the color ball 931 encounters the hold indication TH is a predetermined period. The length of the predetermined period is different depending on whether the effect is successful or not, but may be the same. In any case, the speed of the color ball 930 changes in the predetermined period.

  The color ball 931 moves at a constant speed for a certain period of time after it has been thrown (until it moves a predetermined distance), but the speed is reduced when the certain period has elapsed. That is, the deceleration period is entered. The situation is shown in FIG. 26 (b). The effect of such deceleration control is, for example, an effect of slow motion reproduction. The deceleration period is 3 seconds or 5 seconds. However, regardless of which deceleration period is set, the period from when the character 930 throws the ball until it enters the deceleration period is common. After the deceleration period due to such slow motion reproduction, the speed of the color ball 931 returns to the initial speed again, and the color ball 931 eventually collides with the target hold indication TH. Note that the effect may be ended while the vehicle is decelerating without returning to the initial velocity, or the velocity after the end of the deceleration period may be different from the velocity in the initial velocity or the deceleration period.

  After that, the pattern of the effect is that the color ball 931 which has collided is broken, the paint in the cover covers the target display of the target, and the successful pattern in which the color of the display is changed to a different color from the original Instead, it bounces and it divides into a failure pattern in which the color of the hold display does not change. FIG. 26C shows a success pattern, and FIG. 26D shows a failure pattern. In the case of the success pattern, the push button 31B vibrates before the color ball 931 breaks, and the player is notified of the success pattern (button notification effect). This can improve the player's sense of expectation. Of course, the push button 31B may or may not vibrate. Note that such advance notification may be performed by voice or image instead of or in addition to the push button 31B. Also, the button notification effect may be determined by lottery. In such a case, it is desirable that the jackpot expectation be higher in the case where the push button 31B vibrates than in the case where the push button 31B does not vibrate. In addition, the vibration of the push button 31B may be strong or weak. In such a case, a lottery including the strength of the push button 31B may be performed at the time of the lottery of the button notification effect. Then, the jackpot expectation may be higher in the case where the push button 31B vibrates stronger than in the case where the push button 31B vibrates weakly.

  In the success pattern, the color of the hold display changes from the original color (eg, gray) to one of a plurality of colors. For example, the variations of the color are white, blue, green and red. Such a color difference represents, for example, a difference in the degree of expectation that the variable display corresponding to the reserved display will be a big hit. For example, red is the most likely to hit the jackpot, followed by green and then blue. The player can provide a more entertaining game because it can focus on which color changes in the success pattern. In order to further increase the expectation for the change in color, the movement of the ball may be temporarily stopped at the stage when the color ball 931 collides with the hold display or just before the collision.

  As described above, according to the on-hold change effect described above, since there is a period in which the speed of the color ball 931 is decelerated before the color ball 931 is released and before it collides with the on-hold display, It can enhance the feeling. In particular, the player's sense of expectation is significantly improved as compared with the effect of causing the on-hold display to collide with the color ball 931 at the same speed without reducing the speed of the color ball 931. Further, since the deceleration period is set selectively from among a plurality of items, it is possible to provide a variety of effects while making the player pay attention to the deceleration period.

  In the above embodiment, the color of the active display or the hold display changes in the active change production or the hold display change production, but the size or shape of the active display or the hold display changes, etc. The display may change in various ways. In addition, although red, green, blue, and white, which are colors of active display and hold display, can be used for both active display and hold display, there are colors, characters, characters, etc. displayed only during active display. There may be a color, a character, a character, etc. which are displayed only at the hold display of the hold display.

  Further, in the above embodiment, by using the pre-reading effect execution determination table shown in FIG. 18, the pre-reading effect execution ratio is made different between the case of big hit and the case of losing, but it is not limited to this. For example, when reach effect is not performed if reach effect is performed by making the execution ratio of the advance effect different depending on the presence / absence of reach effect corresponding to the start winning based on the change pattern corresponding to the change category command The execution ratio of the pre-reading effect may be set higher than that. Also, based on the fluctuation time indicated by the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation category command, the execution ratio of the pre-reading effect is made different, and when fluctuation time is more than predetermined time, pre-reading effect is executed rather than the case of less than predetermined time. The ratio may be increased.

  In the above embodiment, the type of the big hit is determined based on the value of the random number MR2 for determining the big hit type, but the condition for determining the type of big hit is not limited to this. For example, a specific area may be provided in the vicinity of or inside the special winning opening, and the type of the big hit may be determined based on the game ball entering (passing) the specific area. . For example, in the case of providing the probability variation big hit and the normal big hit, the probability variation big hit may be determined based on the game ball entering the specific area.

  In the above embodiment, the big hit gaming state is controlled based on the big hit symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 4A and the second special symbol display 4B, but the big hit gaming state is controlled. The aspect to perform is not limited to this. For example, a specific area is provided in the vicinity of the second starting winning opening or inside the second starting winning opening, and is controlled to the big hit gaming state based on the game ball entering (passing) in the specific area You may be there.

  In the above-mentioned embodiment, although a mode which carries out variable display of a plurality of kinds of special symbols, such as a number or a symbol of 0-9, and derives and displays a display result is shown, variable display is not limited to such a mode. For example, the special symbol to be displayed variably may be different from the special symbol to be derived and displayed as the variable display result. In other words, special symbols that are not included in the changing multiple types of special symbols may be derived and displayed as the variable display result, and among the changing multiple types of special symbols, those that are not specially derived displayed as the variable display result May be included. Moreover, it is not necessary to variably display a plurality of types of special symbols, and the aspect may be such that variable display is performed using only one type of special symbol. As a variable display using one type of special symbol, for example, the one type of special symbol may be blinked (may be alternately turned on / off). That is, repetition of lighting and extinguishing may be variable display. And even in this case, the one kind of special symbol may be derived and displayed (lit) at the end, or a symbol different from the one kind of symbol may be derived and displayed at the end It may be In addition, the same applies to variable display of other symbols (for example, a normal symbol, a decorative symbol, etc.).

  For example, in the above, “percentage” is not limited to a relationship such as A: B = 70%: 30% or A: B = 30%: 70%, such as A: B = 100%: 0% It is a concept that also includes a relationship (that is, a concept that includes 100% for one and 0% for the other). Also, when A is said to have a higher proportion than B, this is a concept that also includes cases where A is 100% and B is less than 100%, and B is 0% and A is greater than 0%. is there.

  Further, for example, in the above embodiment, one fluctuation is started when the fluctuation is started in order to notify the effect control board 12 of the fluctuation pattern indicating the fluctuation mode such as the fluctuation time and the type of reach effect and the presence or absence of pseudo link. Although the example which transmits a pattern designation command was shown, you may make it notify a change pattern to the production control board 12 by two or more commands. Specifically, when notified by two commands, the microcomputer 100 for game control is the first command before reaching reach, such as presence or absence of pseudo reciprocation, presence or absence of slip effect (if it does not reach, so-called Send a command indicating the fluctuation time and fluctuation mode before the second stop, and the second command after reaching reach such as reach type and re-lottery effect (if it does not reach, so-called (2) after the stop may be transmitted a command indicating a fluctuation time or a fluctuation mode. In this case, the effect control board 12 may perform effect control in the variable display based on the fluctuation time derived from the combination of two commands. The game control microcomputer 100 notifies the fluctuation time by each of the two commands, and the effect control board 12 selects a specific fluctuation mode to be executed at each timing. It is also good. When sending two commands, two commands may be sent within the same timer interrupt, and after sending a first command, after a predetermined period has elapsed (for example, the next timer interrupt) And the second command may be sent. In addition, the fluctuation | variation aspect shown by each command is not necessarily limited to this example, It can change suitably also about the order to transmit. As described above, by notifying the fluctuation pattern by two or more commands, it is possible to reduce the amount of data which has to be stored as the fluctuation pattern designation command.

  In addition, the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as a prize based on the occurrence of a prize, and it encloses the gaming media and scores based on the occurrence of a prize. The present invention can also be applied to an enclosed game machine to be granted.

  In addition, what is displayed during the variable display of the special symbol is only one kind of outlying symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-"), and the variable display is performed by repeating the display and the extinguishment of the symbol. It is also good. Further, even when the symbol is displayed during variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (a symbol indicating “−” may not be displayed as a display result).

  In the above embodiment, although the main side performs the pre-read determination and transmits the command corresponding to the determination result to the sub side, the main side transmits the command indicating the random value and the sub side performs the pre-read determination. You may do it.

  Further, in the above embodiment, it is determined whether or not the gaming state after the big hit gaming state is set as the “probable change state” by determining the big hit type at the start of the change, but the opening of the big winning opening at the start of the change Only the pattern (the mode of the round game) is determined (you need to specify by the big hit classification etc.), based on the fact that the game ball passes the specified area (for example, the specified area in the big winning opening) during the big hit game state The gaming state after the jackpot gaming state may be set to the “probable change state”.

  In addition, for example, using a frequency that is a game value of a size specified by recording information of a game recording medium such as a prepaid card or a membership card, a game score for use in a game is awarded and awarded. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine in which a player plays a game by driving a game ball enclosed in a game machine into the game area using the game score or the game score given by the game winning.

  In the above description, the game machine uses game media as an example, but the game machine according to the present invention is not limited to a game machine that pays out a game medium as a predetermined number of prizes, but is a game medium such as a game ball The present invention can also be applied to an enclosed game machine that provides a score when the condition for giving a prize is satisfied.

  The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form of being distributed / provided by a removable recording medium to the computer device etc. included in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the computer device etc. may be previously provided. It may be distributed by pre-installing it in the storage device of. Furthermore, by providing a communication processing unit, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like. It does not matter.

  And the execution form of the game is not limited to that executed by attaching the removable recording medium, but can be executed by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via the communication line etc. in the internal memory etc. It may be executed directly using hardware resources of another device on the network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

  The present invention is not limited to the one described above. Further, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if there are changes and additions within the scope of the present invention in addition to the above-described embodiment and other embodiments described later.

  In addition, all or some of the configurations shown in the embodiment and the modifications described above and the configurations shown in each embodiment described later may be arbitrarily combined.

  It should be understood that the above-described embodiment disclosed this time and the form described below are illustrative and non-restrictive in every respect. The scope of the present invention is shown not by the above description and the following description but by the claims, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the claims.

  The gaming machine according to the present invention is also a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state by including display means (for example, the image display device 5 etc.), and a rendering device (for example, a rendering combination object) capable of executing rendering. 90201), an operable movable body (for example, push button 90120), and the effect device, it is possible to execute a specific effect (for example, specific effect shown in FIG. 63 (5)) in the vicinity of the movable body Specific effect executing means (for example, a portion for executing step S908120 in microcomputer 90100 for effect control) and movable body control means for operating the movable body (for example, a portion for executing step S908111 in microcomputer 90100 for effect control) And whether or not to be controlled to the above-mentioned advantageous state by the aspect of the effect performed by the predetermined effect means Means for executing a suggestion effect to be instigated, and also capable of executing a production supplementary display related to the suggestion effect on the display means (for example, the CPU 120 for effect control that executes the processing of step S804 or step S805) The movable body control means can operate the movable body when the specific effect is executed (for example, after the vibration operation of the push button 90120 shown in FIG. 63 (3) 5), the suggestion effect executing means can execute the effect auxiliary display at different positions depending on whether or not a specific condition is satisfied (eg, Yes in step S803) When it is determined, the processing in step S805 is performed, and the like.

  According to the above-mentioned gaming machine, it is possible to diversify the execution pattern of the presentation support display, and to prevent the decrease in the amusement of the game. In addition, the effect of the specific effect can be improved.

  Further, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, when the movable body is operated, presentation assistance display may be performed. According to such a configuration, attention can be paid to the movable body and the specific effect, and the effect of the specific effect can be further improved.

  Further, the display means and the rendering device in the above-mentioned gaming machine may be the same device (liquid crystal display device etc.). Further, the rendering means and the rendering device or the movable body in the above-mentioned gaming machine may be the same device.

  Further, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, the movable body may be made operable when the suggested rendering or the rendering assistance display is performed. According to such a configuration, attention can be focused by the suggested rendering and the rendering assistance display, and the rendering effect can be further improved.

  Furthermore, as an example of the form of the gaming machine which can improve the rendering effect of the specific effect, it is a gaming machine capable of playing a game, and a rendering device capable of executing the rendering (for example, the rendering combination 90201) Specific effect executing means capable of executing a specific effect (for example, a specific effect shown in FIG. 63 (5)) in the vicinity of the movable body using an operable movable body (for example, push button 90120) and a rendering device (For example, a portion for executing step S908120 in the effect control microcomputer 90100) and movable body control means for operating the movable body (for example, a portion for performing step S908111 in the effect control microcomputer 90100) The body control means can operate the movable body when the specific effect is performed (for example, FIG. After the vibration operation of the push button 90120 shown), it executes a specific effect shown in FIG. 63 (5)) the gaming machine and the like. Hereinafter, an example of this gaming machine will be described as another embodiment.

Another Embodiment
Hereinafter, the first other embodiment will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of a pachinko gaming machine 901, which is an example of a gaming machine, will be described. FIG. 27 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 901 viewed from the front.

  The pachinko gaming machine 901 is configured of an outer frame (not shown) formed in a vertically long rectangular shape, and a game frame attached to the inside of the outer frame so as to be openable and closable. In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 901 has a glass door frame 902 formed in the shape of a frame provided so as to be openable and closable in the game frame. The play frame is a front frame (not shown) installed openably and closably to the outer frame, a mechanism board (not shown) to which mechanism parts and the like are attached, and various parts attached to them (a game to be described later And the board 906).

  On the lower surface of the glass door frame 902 is a striking ball supply plate (upper plate) 903. At the lower part of the hit ball supply tray 903 is provided a surplus ball receiving tray 904 for storing gaming balls which can not be accommodated in the hit ball supply tray 903 and a hit operation handle (operation knob) 905 for firing a hit ball. In addition, a game board 906 is removably attached to the back of the glass door frame 902. The game board 906 is a structure including a plate-like body that constitutes the game board and various components attached to the plate-like body. In addition, on the front of the game board 906, a game area 907 is formed in which the thrown game balls can flow down.

  The member forming the surplus ball tray (lower plate) 904 is, for example, in a stick shape (rod shape) at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the lower plate main body (for example, the central portion of the lower plate). There is attached a stick controller 90122 which can be held and tilted in a plurality of directions (front and rear, left and right). In the stick controller 90122, while the player holds the operating stick of the stick controller 90122 with the operating hand (for example, the left hand), a predetermined operating finger (for example, the forefinger or the like) A trigger button 90121 (see FIG. 31) capable of instructing operation is provided, and a trigger sensor 90125 (shown in FIG. 31) detects a predetermined instructing operation such as a push and pull operation on the trigger button 90121 31) is built-in. In addition, a tilting direction sensor unit 90123 (see FIG. 31) for detecting a tilting operation with respect to the operating rod is provided in the lower main body inside the lower portion of the stick controller 90122 or the like. Also, the stick controller 90122 incorporates a vibrator motor 90126 (see FIGS. 27 and 31) for vibrating the stick controller 90122.

  On the member forming the hit ball supply plate (upper plate) 903, the player performs a predetermined instruction operation, for example, by pressing the predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the upper plate main body (for example, above the stick controller 90122). A possible push button 90120 is provided. The push button 90120 may be configured to be able to mechanically, electrically or electromagnetically detect a predetermined instruction operation by a player or the like. A push sensor 90361 (see FIG. 31) for detecting the operation performed by the player on the push button 90120 may be provided inside the body of the upper tray at the installation position of the push button 90120. In the configuration example shown in FIG. 27, the mounting positions of the push button 90120 and the stick controller 90122 are in the vertical positional relationship in the central portion of the upper and lower dishes. On the other hand, the mounting positions of the push button 90120 and the stick controller 90122 may be shifted to either the left or the right in the upper and lower plates while maintaining the upper and lower positional relationship. Alternatively, the mounting positions of the push button 90120 and the stick controller 90122 may not be in the vertical positional relationship, but may be in the horizontal positional relationship, for example.

  Near the center of the game area 907, an effect display device 909 configured of a liquid crystal display (LCD) is provided. The display screen of the effect display device 909 has an effect symbol display area for performing variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Thus, the effect display device 909 corresponds to a variable display device that performs variable display of the effect symbol. In the effect symbol display area, there are symbol display areas for variably displaying effect symbols for three decorations (for effect), for example, “left”, “middle” and “right”. There are symbol display areas of "left", "middle" and "right" in the symbol display area, but the position of the symbol display area may not be fixed on the display screen of the effect display device 909, or the symbol Three areas of the display area may be separated. The effect display device 909 is controlled by the effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board. When variable display of the first special symbol is being executed by the first special symbol display device 908a, the effect control microcomputer causes the effect display device 909 to execute effect display along with the variable display, and the second special symbol is displayed. When the variable display of the second special symbol is being executed by the symbol display 908b, the effect display is executed by the effect display device 909 along with the variable display, so it is possible to easily grasp the progress of the game. .

  Further, in the effect display device 909, symbols other than the symbol to be the final stop symbol (for example, middle symbol among the left and right middle symbols) continue for a predetermined time, and the big hit symbol (for example, left middle right symbol is the same symbol Stop, swing, scale, shrink or deform in a state that matches the symbol combination), or multiple symbols change synchronously with the same symbol, or the positions of the display symbols are changed An effect performed in a state where the possibility of the occurrence of a big hit continues before the final result is displayed (hereinafter, these states are referred to as a reach state) is called reach effect. In addition, reach state and the appearance are called reach mode. Furthermore, variable display including reach production is called reach variable display. Then, when the display result of the symbol variably displayed on the effect display device 909 is not a big hit symbol, it becomes "off", and the variation display state is ended. A player plays while enjoying how to generate a big hit.

  In the upper right portion of the display screen of the effect display device 909, fourth symbol display areas 909c and 909d are provided to display a fourth symbol that follows the effect symbol, the special symbol to be described later, and the normal symbol. In this other embodiment, a fourth symbol display area 909c for the first special symbol in which the variation display of the fourth symbol for the first special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the first special symbol described later; A fourth symbol display area 909 d for the second special symbol is provided in which the variation display of the fourth symbol for the second special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the second special symbol.

  The fourth symbol for the first special symbol and the fourth symbol for the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as the fourth symbol, and the fourth symbol display area 909c for the first special symbol and the second special The fourth symbol display area 909 d for symbols may be collectively referred to as a fourth symbol display area.

  Variation of the fourth symbol (variable display) is realized by continuing turning on and off of the fourth symbol display areas 909c and 909d with a predetermined display color (for example, blue) at predetermined time intervals. . The variable display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display 908a and the variable display of the fourth symbol for the first special symbol in the fourth symbol display area 909c for the first special symbol are synchronized. The variable display of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display 908b and the variable display of the fourth symbol for the second special symbol in the fourth symbol display area 909d for the second special symbol are synchronized. Synchronization means that the start point and the end point of the variable display are the same and the period of the variable display is the same.

  On the right of the effect display device 909, a first special symbol display (a first variable display unit) 908a that variably displays a first special symbol as identification information is provided. In this other embodiment, the first special symbol display 908a is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7-segment LED) capable of variably displaying the numbers 0-9. That is, the first special symbol display 908a is configured to variably display the numbers 0 to 9 (or symbols). In addition, a second special symbol display (second variable display unit) 908b that variably displays a second special symbol as identification information on the right side of the effect display device 909 (next to the right of the first special symbol display 908a). Is also provided. The second special symbol display 908 b is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7-segment LED) capable of variably displaying the numbers 0 to 9. That is, the second special symbol display 908b is configured to variably display the numbers 0 to 9 (or symbols).

  The small display is formed, for example, in a square shape. Moreover, in this other embodiment, although the kind of 1st special symbol and the kind of 2nd special symbol are the same (for example, both numbers of 0-9), kinds may differ. In addition, the first special symbol display 908a and the second special symbol display 908b may be configured to variably display, for example, the numbers 00 to 99 (or two-digit symbols).

  Hereinafter, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as a special symbol, and the first special symbol indicator 908a and the second special symbol indicator 908b are generically referred to as a special symbol indicator (variable indicator) There is something to do.

  Although this second embodiment shows the case where the two special symbol displays 908a and 908b are provided, the gaming machine may have only one special symbol display.

  The variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is the first start condition or the second start condition which is the execution condition of the variable display (for example, the game ball is the first start winning opening 9013 or the second starting winning opening After passing 9014 (including winning), the variable display start condition (for example, when the number of reserved memories is not 0, variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is not executed It is a state, and it is started based on the state where the big hit game is not executed) being established, and when the variable display time (variation time) passes, the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. The game ball passing means that the game ball has passed through an area previously defined as a winning area such as a winning opening or a gate, and the concept including that the gaming ball is in the winning opening (winning) It is. Furthermore, deriving and displaying a display result means to stop and display a symbol (example of identification information).

  Below the effect display device 909, a winning device having a first start winning opening 9013 is provided. The game ball that has won the first start winning opening 9013 is guided to the back of the game board 906, and is detected by the first start opening switch 9013a.

  Further, a variable winning ball device 9015 having a second starting winning opening 9014 capable of winning a game ball is provided below the winning device having the first starting winning opening (first starting opening) 9013. The game ball that has won the second starting winning opening (second starting opening) 9014 is guided to the back of the game board 906, and is detected by the second starting opening switch 9014a. The variable winning ball device 9015 is opened by the solenoid 9016. When the variable winning ball device 9015 is in the open state, the gaming ball can be won in the second starting winning opening 9014 (it becomes easy to start winning), which is advantageous for the player. When the variable winning ball device 9015 is in the open state, the game ball is more likely to win the second starting winning hole 9014 than the first starting winning hole 9013. Also, in a state where the variable winning ball device 9015 is in the closed state, the gaming ball does not win the second start winning opening 9014. Therefore, in the state where the variable winning ball device 9015 is in the closed state, the game ball is more likely to win the first starting winning hole 9013 than the second starting winning hole 9014. In the state where the variable winning ball device 9015 is in the closed state, although it is difficult to win, it may be configured to be able to win (that is, it is difficult for the gaming ball to win).

  Hereinafter, the first starting winning opening 9013 and the second starting winning opening 9014 may be collectively referred to as a starting winning opening or a starting opening.

  When the variable winning ball device 9015 is controlled to the open state, the gaming ball heading to the variable winning ball device 9015 is extremely likely to win a prize in the second start winning opening 9014. And although the first start winning opening 9013 is provided immediately below the effect display device 909, the distance between the lower end of the effect display device 909 and the first start winning opening 9013 may be further narrowed, or the first start winning opening It is difficult to arrange the nails closely around 9013 and to make it difficult to guide the game ball to the first start winning opening 9013 by arranging the nails around the first starting winning opening 9013, and the winning ratio of the second start winning opening 9014 You may make it be higher than the prize-winning rate of the 1st starting winning a prize mouth 9013.

  Above the second special symbol display 908b, there is a second special symbol hold storage indicator 9018b consisting of four indicators for displaying the number of activated winning balls that have entered the second start winning opening 9014, that is, the second reserve memory number. It is provided. The second special symbol hold storage indicator 9018b increases the number of lighted indicators by one each time there is a valid start winning. Then, every time variable display on the second special symbol display 908b is started, the number of lighted indicators is reduced by one.

  Further, above the second special symbol suspension storage indicator 9018b, the number of activated winning balls entering the first starting winning opening 9013, that is, the first suspension storage number (pending storage is also referred to as start storage or start winning storage). A first special symbol hold storage indicator 9018a consisting of four indicators for displaying) is provided. The first special symbol hold storage indicator 9018a increases the number of lighted indicators by one each time there is a valid start winning. Then, every time variable display on the first special symbol display 908a is started, the number of lighted indicators is reduced by one.

  In addition, the display screen of the effect display device 909 is provided with a first hold storage display unit 909a for displaying the first hold storage number and a second hold storage display unit 909b for displaying the second hold storage number . Note that a combined hold storage display unit may be provided that displays the total number (the total number of pending storages) that is the sum of the first pending storage number and the second pending storage number. With such a configuration, it is possible to easily grasp the total number of satisfaction of execution conditions in which the variable display start condition is not satisfied.

  The effect display device 909 is for decoration (for effect) during the variable display time of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display 908a and during the variable display time of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display 908b. Perform variable display of the effect design as a symbol of. The variable display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display 908a and the variable display of the effect symbol in the effect display device 909 are synchronized. In addition, the variable display of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display 908b and the variable display of the effect symbol in the effect display device 909 are synchronized. In addition, when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol display 908a, and when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the second special symbol display 908b, a rendering symbol that evokes a big hit in the effect display device 909 The combination of is displayed stopped.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 27, on the right of the variable winning ball device 9015, a special variable winning ball device 9020 for forming a large winning opening is provided. Special variable winning ball device 9020 has an open / close plate, and when the specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 908a, the specific display result (big hit symbol) on the second special symbol display 908b In the specific gaming state (big hit gaming state) that occurs when the display is derived, the opening / closing plate is controlled to the open state by the solenoid 9021 so that the big winning opening serving as the winning area is opened. The game ball that has won the special winning opening is detected by the count switch 9023.

  In the other embodiment, the special variable winning ball device 9020 is provided on the right side of the game area 907. Therefore, in the big hit gaming state, the player makes the special variable winning ball device 9020 the gaming ball. In order to win a prize, a shooting operation (so-called right hitting) is performed aiming at the right side of the game area 907. The gate 9032 and the variable winning ball device 9015 may be provided to the right of the game area 907 so that a right-handed operation can be performed even when the gaming state is the time saving state or the high base state. Good.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 27, below the variable winning ball device 9015, a rendering combination 90201 imitating a face of a character or the like is provided. A character product LED 90202 is provided in a portion simulating a face of a character or the like in the effect character 90201, and it is possible to perform predetermined effects by lighting and displaying the character LED 90202 of the effect character 90201. It is done. Further, in the other embodiment, the accessory LED 90202 is configured by a full color LED, and can emit light in various lighting colors such as white and red, and changes the lighting color to emit light in order It is also possible to emit light by rainbow display (rainbow display) depending on the situation.

  On the left side of the effect display device 909, an ordinary symbol display 9010 for variably displaying an ordinary symbol is provided. In this other embodiment, the normal symbol display 9010 is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7-segment LED) capable of variably displaying the numbers 0-9. That is, the normal symbol display 9010 is configured to variably display the numbers 0 to 9 (or symbols). Moreover, the small display is formed, for example, in a square shape. The normal symbol display 9010 may be configured to variably display, for example, the numbers 00 to 99 (or two-digit symbols). In addition, the normal symbol display 9010 is not limited to a 7-segment LED etc., for example, a display capable of lighting a predetermined symbol display (for example, a decorative lamp capable of alternately lighting and displaying "o" and "x") May be composed of

  When the game ball passes through the gate 9032 and is detected by the gate switch 9032a, variable display of the display of the normal symbol display 9010 is started. Then, when the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 9010 is a predetermined symbol (hit symbol, for example, symbol “7”), the variable winning ball device 9015 is opened for a predetermined number of times and for a predetermined time. That is, when the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a hit symbol, the variable winning ball device 9015 is in a state advantageous to the player from a disadvantageous state (a state where the game ball can be won in the second start winning opening 9014) Change to In the vicinity of the normal symbol display 9010, a normal symbol hold storage indicator 9041 having a display unit with four LEDs for displaying the number of winning balls having passed through the gate 9032 is provided. Every time the game ball passes to the gate 9032, that is, whenever the game ball is detected by the gate switch 9032a, the normal symbol hold storage indicator 9041 increases the number of LEDs to be turned on by one. Then, whenever variable display of the normal symbol display 9010 is started, the number of LEDs to be lit is reduced by one. Furthermore, a probability change state in which the probability determined to be a big hit as compared to the normal state is high (a state in which the probability of being determined as a big hit as a result of the variation display of the special symbol is increased compared to the normal state) Then, the probability that the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 9010 will hit is increased, and the opening time and the number of times of opening of the variable winning ball device 9015 are increased. In addition, even in the time reduction state (the game state in which the variable display time of the special symbol is shortened), which is not a definite change state but the symbol variation time is shortened, the opening time and the opening number of the variable winning ball device 9015 are increased.

  At the lower part of the game board 906, there is an out port 9026 where a non-winning hit ball is taken. Further, on the upper left and right upper and lower left and right sides of the game area 907, four speakers 9027 for producing sound effects and sounds as predetermined sound outputs are provided. On the outer periphery of the game area 907, a frame LED 9028 provided on the front frame is provided.

  In the game machine, a ball hitting and firing device (not shown) which drives a drive motor in response to the player operating the ball hitting operation handle 905 and uses the rotational force of the drive motor to launch the game ball into the game area 907 ) Is provided. The game balls fired from the hit ball launching device enter the game area 907 through the ball hitting rails formed in a circular shape so as to surround the game area 907, and then descend the game area 907. If the game ball enters the first starting winning opening 9013 and is detected by the first starting opening switch 9013a, it is possible to start variable display of the first special symbol (for example, the variable display of the special symbol ends, the first The start condition of 1 is satisfied), the variable display (variation) of the first special symbol is started in the first special symbol display 908a, and the variable display of the effect symbol is started in the effect display device 909. That is, the variable display of the first special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to the winning of the first start winning opening 9013. If it is not in a state where variable display of the first special symbol can be started, the first number of pending storages is increased by 1 on the condition that the first number of pending storages has not reached the upper limit value.

  If the game ball enters the second starting winning opening 9014 and is detected by the second starting opening switch 9014a, if it is in a state where variable display of the second special symbol can be started (for example, variable display of the special symbol ends, the second The start condition of 2 is satisfied), the variable display (variation) of the second special symbol is started in the second special symbol display 908b, and the variable display of the effect symbol is started in the effect display device 909. That is, the variable display of the second special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to the winning of the second start winning opening 9014. If it is not in a state where variable display of the second special symbol can be started, the second pending storage number is increased by one on the condition that the second pending storage number has not reached the upper limit value.

  In this other embodiment, the game state is shifted to the high probability state (probable change state) and the game ball is more likely to be start-up winning (i.e., the special symbol indicator 908a, 908b) when it becomes a probability change big hit And transition to a high base state, which is a gaming state controlled so as to facilitate execution conditions of variable display in the effect display device 909 (in other embodiment, transition to a time saving state). Also, when the gaming state is shifted to the short time state, it shifts to the high base state. In the high base state, for example, the frequency with which the variable winning ball device 9015 is in the open state is increased or the time in which the variable winning ball device 9015 is in the open state is extended. It will be easier to get started.

  In addition, instead of extending the time when the variable winning ball device 9015 is in the open state (also referred to as the open extension state), transition to the normal symbol probability state in which the probability of the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 9010 hitting is increased. It is possible to move to the high base state. When the stop symbol in the normal symbol indicator 9010 becomes a predetermined symbol (hit symbol), the variable winning ball device 9015 is opened for a predetermined time for a predetermined number of times. In this case, by performing transition control to the normal symbol probability change state, the probability that the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 9010 will hit is increased, and the frequency with which the variable winning ball device 9015 is opened increases. Therefore, if it shifts to the normal symbol certainty variation state, the opening time and the number of times of opening of the variable winning prize ball device 9015 are increased, and it becomes a state (high base state) in which start winning is easy. That is, the opening time and the number of times of opening of the variable winning ball device 9015 is enhanced when the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a hit symbol or the stop symbol of a special symbol is a definite symbol, etc. Change to an advantageous state (start start winning state). Note that increasing the number of times of opening is a concept that includes changing from the closed state to the open state.

  In addition, the transition to the high base state may be made by transitioning to the normal symbol time short state in which the variation time (variable display period) of the normal symbol in the normal symbol display 9010 is shortened. In the normal symbol time short state, since the variation time of the normal symbol is shortened, the frequency at which the variation of the normal symbol starts is increased, and as a result, the frequency at which the normal symbol is hit is increased. Therefore, when the frequency with which the normal symbol is hit is high, the frequency with which the variable winning ball device 9015 is in the open state is high, and it becomes a state (high base state) in which start winning is easy.

  In addition, by shifting to a time reduction state in which the variation time (variable display period) of the special symbol and the representation symbol is shortened, the variation time of the special symbol and the representation symbol is shortened, so the variation of the special symbol and the representation symbol starts It is possible to reduce the frequency of occurrence (in other words, the quickening of the reserve memory) and the occurrence of an invalid start winning. Therefore, an effective start winning is likely to occur, and as a result, the possibility of playing a big hit game is increased.

  In addition, it is possible to start winning easily (transition to the high base state) by transitioning to all the states shown above (open extension state, normal pattern exact variation state, normal symbol time short state and special symbol time short state) May be In addition, it is easy to start winning by shifting to any one of the above-mentioned states (open extension state, normal symbol probability change state, normal symbol time short state and special symbol time short state) (high base (high base) (Transition to the state). In addition, it is easy to start winning by shifting to any one of the above-mentioned states (open extension state, normal symbol probability change state, normal symbol time short state and special symbol time short state) (high It may be made to shift to the base state).

  Next, the internal structure of the push button 90120 will be described. 28 and 29 are exploded perspective views for explaining the internal structure of push button 90120. As shown in FIGS. 28 and 29, a holding member 90302 for holding the vibration receiving member 90303 is provided inside the transparent cover 90301 of the push button 90120. In this other embodiment, one holding member 90302 holds all the vibrated members 90303. In the holding member 90302, a plurality of (13) arrangement holes 90325 for arranging the respective vibration receiving members 90303 are penetrated. The vibration receiving member 90303 and the arrangement hole 90325 correspond one to one, and the shape of the arrangement hole 90325 has a regular hexagonal shape in plan view corresponding to the shape of the vibration receiving member 90303. Furthermore, the vibration receiving member 90303 is inserted into the arrangement hole 90325 from below. On the outer peripheral surface of the lower end portion of the member 90303 to be vibrated, a protruding edge portion (not shown) which is a retention stopper for preventing removal from the arrangement hole 90325 is provided in a protruding manner. The protruding edge portion is provided so that the diameter dimension of the lower end portion of the member to be vibrated 90303 is larger than the opening dimension of the arrangement hole 90325.

  Further, in the vicinity of the disposition hole 90325 in the holding member 90302, the same shape as the vibration receiving member 90303 is formed in a regular hexagonal shape in plan view, and it is visually recognized that the vibration receiving member 90303 is vibrating. An auxiliary visual recognition unit 90326 is formed to facilitate the process. The auxiliary visual recognition part 90326 is a part integrally formed on the holding member 90302, and provided at a plurality of places of the holding member 90302, in particular, around the arrangement hole 90325. It is not necessary that all the auxiliary visual recognition parts 90326 have the same shape as the vibration receiving member 90303, and the auxiliary visual recognition parts 90326 formed at the corners of the holding member 90302 have a partially cut away shape, that is, The part has the same shape as that of a part of the vibration-receiving member 90303 (a shape in which a part of a regular hexagon is cut out).

  Further, in this other embodiment, the stick controller 90122 can be vibrated by driving the vibrator motor 90126 provided in the stick controller 90122, and the push integrated with the stick controller 90122 is used. The button 90120 can also be vibrated, which can also cause the vibrated member 90303 to vibrate. Since the vibration receiving member 90303 vibrates with a large amplitude when the push button 90120 is vibrating, the auxiliary visual recognition part 90326 integral with the holding member 90302 vibrates with a smaller amplitude than the vibration receiving member 90303, so the vibration mode The vibration of the vibrating member 90303 is emphasized and visually recognized due to the difference in (amplitude).

  Although FIGS. 28 and 29 illustrate the vibrating member 90303 as halftone dots for the sake of understanding, the color of the vibrating member 90303 and the color of the auxiliary visual recognition unit 90326 are the same. . That is, in the state where the vibration receiving member 90303 is not vibrating, it is difficult to distinguish between the vibration receiving member 90303 and the auxiliary visual recognition unit 90326, and it is difficult to identify which portion is the vibrating portion. . Therefore, when the member 90303 to be vibrated starts to vibrate, unexpectedness is generated and the fun of the game is improved.

  Further, below the members to be vibrated 90303, vibration lens members 90304 for transmitting vibration to the members to be vibrated 90303 are provided. In this other embodiment, a single plate-like vibrating lens member 90304 is provided, and the vibration applied to the vibrating lens member 90304 is transmitted to each of the vibrating members 90303. The inside of the vibration receiving member 90303 has a hollow shape, and has a rocking shaft protruding downward at the center thereof. A plurality of bottomed holes 90335 in which the lower end of the swing shaft of the member 90303 to be vibrated is disposed on the upper surface side of the vibration lens member 90304 is provided. Further, the vibration receiving member 90303 is provided swingably around the lower end of the swing shaft.

  Further, among the plurality of bottomed hole portions 90335 formed in the vibration lens member 90304, some bottomed hole portions 90335 are formed in a convex portion 90336 protruding upward from the vibration lens member 90304. The protruding lengths of the respective convex portions 90336 are formed to be different. That is, when the height position of the bottom portion of each bottomed hole portion 90335 is different, when the member to be vibrated 90303 is swung around the lower end of the swinging shaft contacting the bottom surface of the bottomed hole portion 90335 In addition, the vibration mode of each of the vibrating members 90303 is different (swings randomly). In this other embodiment, in the vibrating lens member 90304, the height position of the bottomed hole portion 90335 provided on the center side of the push button 90120 is high, and the bottom hole provided on the peripheral side of the push button 90120. The height position of the portion 90335 is lowered. The height positions of the respective vibration receiving members 90303 differ according to the difference in the height position of the bottomed hole portion 90335.

  As shown in FIG. 28, a plate-like button base member 90305 is provided below the vibrating lens member 90304. The holding member 90302 holding the member to be vibrated 90303 is connected to the button base member 90305 in a state in which the vibrating lens member 90304 is accommodated therein. The vibrating lens member 90304 is placed on the upper surface side of the button base member 90305, and the vibrating lens member 90304 is provided so as to be able to vibrate with respect to the button base member 90305. Further, on the periphery of the button base member 90305, an engaged portion 90343 with which an engagement convex portion 90327 provided on the periphery of the holding member 90302 is engaged is provided. In addition, the transparent cover 90301 is connected to the button base member 90305 from above. At the peripheral edge of the button base member 90305, an engagement convex portion 90345 engaged with an engaged concave portion 90323 provided at the peripheral edge of the transparent cover 90301 is provided.

  In this other embodiment, the holding member 90302, the member to be vibrated 90303, the vibrating lens member 90304, and the button base member 90305 are made of a material having translucency, and as will be described later, for effects to be irradiated from below The light of the button LED 90360 can be transmitted. The vibration receiving member 90303, the vibration lens member 90304, and the button base member 90305 do not have to be completely transparent, and may be an opaque member such as ground glass if it is at least translucent. It may be a colored member.

  In addition, although the transparent cover 90301 mentioned above is comprised as a perfect transparent member, it is not limited to this, If it is the transparency degree to which the vibration aspect of the to-be-vibrated member 90303 can be visually recognized (recognition) The transparent cover 90301 may be an opaque member such as ground glass, or may be a colored member.

  As shown in FIG. 29, below the button base member 90305, a plate-shaped base member 90306 is provided. At a central portion of the base member 90306, a coil spring 90355 is provided as biasing means for biasing the button base member 90305 in one direction (upward). One end of the coil spring 90355 is disposed in a spring placement portion 90354 formed in the central portion of the upper surface of the base member 90306, and the other end of the coil spring 90355 is a spring formed in the central portion of the lower surface of the button base member 90305. It is attached to the attachment convex part. The coil spring 90355 has a biasing force in the direction in which it is extended, and the coil spring 90355 applies a biasing force to the button base member 90305 so as to move upward.

  Further, in the vicinity of the peripheral edge on the lower surface side of the button base member 90305, an engaging claw 90344 inserted into the mounting hole 90353 of the base member 90306 is protruded downward. The button base member 90305 is attached to the base member 90306 so as to be movable in the vertical direction with respect to the base member 90306 by the engagement claw 90344 being loosely fitted in the attachment hole 90353. Further, the lower end portion of the engagement claw 90344 has a hook shape, and the engagement claw 90344 is configured not to be pulled upward from the mounting hole 90353. That is, even if the button base member 90305 is raised by the biasing force of the coil spring 90355, the movement range is restricted by the engagement claw 90344.

  Further, on the outer peripheral edge of the transparent cover 90301, a horizontally protruding convex strip 90321 formed so as to surround the outer peripheral edge is provided. Further, a convex piece 90322 is provided at the front end of the transparent cover 90301. The convex strip 90321 of the transparent cover 90301 is hooked to the hooking strip provided on the inner peripheral edge of the button placement portion 90308, and the convex piece 90322 of the transparent cover 90301 is provided at the front end of the button placement portion 90308 Since the button base member 90305 is lifted, the movement range is restricted by being hooked to the hooked portion.

  In this other embodiment, the transparent cover 90301, the holding member 90302, the vibrating member 90303, the vibrating lens member 90304, and the button base member 90305 are integrated by the player pressing the push button 90120. , Is moved downward against the biasing force of the coil spring 90355. In this other embodiment, the transparent cover 90301, the holding member 90302, the vibration receiving member 90303, the vibrating lens member 90304, and the button base member 90305 form a moving portion supported movably by the base member 90306. .

  In addition, the push button 90120 is arranged in the inner arrangement space 90370 of the button arrangement unit 90308. A screw fixing hole 90312 through which a screw for fixing the base member 90306 is inserted is provided in an upper portion of the operation rod 90309 (a root portion of the button placement portion 90308). The screw fixing holes 90312 are provided at two places on the left and right. Furthermore, female screw parts 90356 are provided at two places on the left and right near one end of the base member 90306 (in the other embodiment, near the front end). The base member 90306 is fixed to the operation rod 90309 by screwing a screw inserted into the screw fixing hole 90312 to the female screw portion 90356. Then, when the vibrator motor 90126 is driven and the operating rod 90309 is vibrated, the vibration is transmitted to the base member 90306 through the screw inserted in the screw fixing hole 90312 and provided above the base member 90306. The push button 90120 (moving unit) vibrates.

  As shown in FIGS. 28 and 29, a button substrate 90307 is provided below the base member 90306. On this button substrate 90307, a button LED 90360 for effect is mounted. A plurality of (in this embodiment, seven) button LEDs 90360 are provided on the button substrate 90307, and the base member 90306 is a window where the button LEDs 90360 are arranged at positions corresponding to the button LEDs 90360 90351 is open. Then, when the button LED 90360 is turned on, light is incident from the lower surface of the button base member 90305, and light refracted and diffused by the light diffusion portion of the vibrating lens member 90304 is further transmitted It is incident from below. Therefore, when the push button 90120 is viewed from the viewpoint of the player, the holding member 90302 and the vibrating member 90303 appear to emit light as well.

  Further, on the button substrate 90307, a push sensor 90361 (photo sensor) for detecting whether or not the pressing operation performed on the push button 90120 has been performed is mounted. Further, in the base member 90306, a window 90352 in which the push sensor 90361 is disposed is opened at a position corresponding to the push sensor 90361. The push sensor 90361 is exposed on the upper surface side of the base member 90306 through the window portion 90352.

  FIG. 30 is a block diagram showing an example of the circuit configuration of the main board (game control board) 9031. FIG. 30 also shows a payout control board 9037, an effect control board 9080, and the like. On the main substrate 9031 is mounted a microcomputer for game control (corresponding to game control means) 90560 which controls the pachinko gaming machine 901 according to a program. The game control microcomputer 90560 includes a ROM 9054 for storing a program for game control (game progression control), a RAM 9055 as a storage unit used as a work memory, a CPU 9056 for performing control operations according to the program, and an I / O port unit 9057 including. In this other embodiment, the ROM 9054 and the RAM 9055 are incorporated in the game control microcomputer 90560. That is, the game control microcomputer 90560 is a one-chip microcomputer. The one-chip microcomputer only needs to have at least the RAM 9055 in addition to the CPU 9056, and the ROM 9054 may be external or internal. Also, the I / O port unit 9057 may be externally attached. The game control microcomputer 90560 further includes a random number circuit 90503 that generates hardware random numbers (random numbers generated by a hardware circuit).

  Further, the RAM 9055 is a backup RAM as a non-volatile storage means backed up by a backup power source, part or all of which is created on the power supply substrate. That is, even if the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, the content of a part or all of the RAM 9055 is saved for a predetermined backup period (until the capacitor as a backup power supply discharges and the backup power supply becomes impossible to supply power). Ru. In particular, data indicating at least the gaming state, that is, the control state of the gaming control means (such as a special symbol process flag or a probability change flag) and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are stored in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary to restore the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like on the basis of the data when the power failure or the like is restored after the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Further, data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress of the game. In this other embodiment, it is assumed that all of the RAM 9055 is backed up by the power supply.

  Note that, since the CPU 9056 executes control according to the program stored in the ROM 9054 in the gaming control microcomputer 90560, hereinafter, the gaming control microcomputer 90560 (or the CPU 9056) executes (or performs processing) Specifically, the CPU 9056 executes control in accordance with a program. The same applies to a microcomputer mounted on another substrate other than the main substrate 9031.

  The random number circuit 90503 is a hardware circuit used to generate a random number for determination to determine whether or not to make a big hit according to the display result of the variable display of the special symbol. The random number circuit 90503 updates the numerical data in accordance with the set update rule within the numerical range in which the initial value (for example, 0) and the upper limit (for example, 65535) are set, and the start occurs at random timing. Based on the fact that the winning is at the time of reading out (extraction) of numerical data, it has a random number generation function in which the numerical data to be read out is a random number.

  Further, an input driver circuit 9058 for giving a detection signal from the gate switch 9032a, the first start opening switch 9013a, the second start opening switch 9014a, and the count switch 9023 to the game control microcomputer 90560 is also mounted on the main substrate 9031. The main circuit board also has a solenoid 9016 for opening and closing the variable winning ball device 9015 and an output circuit 9059 for driving the solenoid 9021 for opening and closing the special variable winning ball device 9020 for forming the special winning opening in accordance with a command from the game control microcomputer 90560. It is mounted on the 9031.

  In addition, the microcomputer for gaming control 90560, the first special symbol indicator 908a which displays the special symbol variably, the second special symbol indicator 908b, the ordinary symbol indicator 9010 which variably displays the ordinary symbol, the first special symbol hold memory Display control of the display 9018a, the second special symbol hold storage indicator 9018b, and the normal symbol hold storage indicator 9041 is performed.

  An information output circuit 9064 is also mounted on the main board 9031. The information output circuit 9064 outputs an information output signal such as big hit information indicating the occurrence of a big hit gaming state to an external device such as a hall computer via the terminal board 90160.

  In this other embodiment, the effect control means (composed of the effect control microcomputer) mounted on the effect control board 9080 receives the effect contents from the game control microcomputer 90560 through the relay board 9077. The effect control command to be instructed is received, and the display control of the effect display device 909 which variably displays the effect pattern is performed.

  In addition, a frame LED 9028 provided on the frame side of the effect control means mounted on the effect control board 9080 via the lamp driver board 9035, an accessory LED 90202 provided on the effect role article 90201 and a push button While performing display control of the button LED 90360 provided in the 90120, control of sound output from the speaker 9027 via the audio output substrate 9070 is performed.

  The effect control means is also connected to the trigger sensor 90125 provided in the stick controller 90122, the tilt direction sensor unit 90123, the vibrator motor 90126, and the push sensor 90361 provided in the push button 90120, as described later. (See FIG. 31), but illustration is omitted in FIG.

  FIG. 31 is a block diagram showing a circuit configuration example of the relay board 9077, the effect control board 9080, the lamp driver board 9035, and the sound output board 9070. In the example shown in FIG. 31, the microcomputer is not mounted on the lamp driver substrate 9035 and the sound output substrate 9070, but a microcomputer may be mounted. Furthermore, only the effect control substrate 9080 may be provided for effect control without providing the lamp driver substrate 9035 and the sound output substrate 9070.

  The effect control board 9080 is mounted with a CPU 90101 for effect control, and a microcomputer 90100 for effect control including a RAM for storing information on effects such as an effect pattern process flag and the like. The RAM may be externally attached. In this other embodiment, the RAM in the effect control microcomputer 90100 is not backed up by a power supply. In the effect control board 9080, the effect control CPU 90101 operates according to a program stored in a built-in or external ROM (not shown) and takes in a signal taken from the main board 9031 input via the relay board 9077 ( In response to the effect control (INT signal), the effect control command is received via the input driver 90102 and the input port 90103. Further, the effect control CPU 90101 causes the VDP (video display processor) 90109 to perform display control of the effect display device 909 based on the effect control command.

  In this other embodiment, a VDP 90109 for controlling display of the effect display device 909 in cooperation with the effect control microcomputer 90100 is mounted on the effect control board 9080. The VDP 90109 has an address space independent of the effect control microcomputer 90100, and maps the VRAM there. VRAM is a buffer memory for expanding image data. Then, the VDP 90109 outputs the image data in the VRAM to the effect display device 909 via the frame memory.

  The effect control CPU 90101 outputs to the VDP 90109 a command for reading out necessary data from a CGROM (not shown) in accordance with the received effect control command. The CGROM stores in advance character image data and moving image data displayed on the effect display device 909, specifically, data of a person, characters, figures, symbols, etc. (including effect pattern), and background image data. It is a ROM for. The VDP 90109 reads out the image data from the CGROM in response to a command from the effect control CPU 90101. Then, the VDP 90109 executes display control based on the read image data.

  The effect control command and the effect control INT signal are first input to the input driver 90102 in the effect control board 9080. The input driver 90102 only allows the signal input from the relay substrate 9077 to pass in the direction toward the inside of the effect control substrate 9080 (does not allow the signal to pass from the inside of the effect control substrate 9080 to the relay substrate 9077) It is also a unidirectional circuit as a regulation means.

  As a signal direction regulation means which allows the signal input from the main substrate 9031 to pass only in the direction toward the effect control substrate 9080 (does not pass the signal in the direction from the effect control substrate 9080 to the relay substrate 9077) to the relay substrate 9077 Unidirectional circuit 9074 is mounted. For example, diodes or transistors are used as unidirectional circuits. A diode is illustrated in FIG. Also, unidirectional circuits are provided for each signal. Further, since the effect control command and the effect control INT signal are outputted from the main substrate 9031 through the output port 90571 which is a unidirectional circuit, the signal from the relay substrate 9077 to the inside of the main substrate 9031 is restricted. That is, the signal from the relay board 9077 does not enter the inside of the main board 9031 (the game control microcomputer 90560 side). The output port 90571 is a part of the I / O port unit 9057 shown in FIG. Further, a signal driver circuit which is a unidirectional circuit may be further provided outside the output port 90571 (the relay substrate 9077 side).

  Further, the effect control CPU 90101 inputs an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation on the trigger button 90121 of the stick controller 90122 has been detected, from the trigger sensor 90125 via the input port 90106. Further, the effect control CPU 90101 inputs an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation on the push button 90120 has been detected, from the push sensor 90361 through the input port 90106. Further, the effect control CPU 90101 inputs an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation with respect to the operation stick of the stick controller 90122 has been detected, from the tilt direction sensor unit 90123 via the input port 90106. . Further, the effect control CPU 90101 causes the stick controller 90122 to vibrate by outputting a drive signal to the vibrator motor 90126 through the output port 90105.

  Further, the effect control CPU 90101 outputs a signal for driving the LED to the lamp driver substrate 9035 via the output port 90105. Further, the effect control CPU 90101 outputs sound number data to the audio output board 9070 via the output port 90104.

  In the lamp driver substrate 9035, a signal for driving the LED is input to the LED driver 90352 via the input driver 90351. The LED driver 90352 supplies current to light emitters such as the frame LED 9028, the feature LED 90202, and the button LED 90360 based on a signal that drives the LEDs.

  In the voice output substrate 9070, the sound number data is input to the voice synthesis IC 90703 via the input driver 90702. The speech synthesis IC 90703 generates speech and sound effects corresponding to the sound number data, and outputs the speech and the sound to the amplification circuit 90705. The amplification circuit 90705 outputs to the speaker 9027 an audio signal obtained by amplifying the output level of the speech synthesis IC 90703 to a level according to the volume set in the volume 90706. The voice data ROM 90704 stores control data corresponding to the sound number data. The control data corresponding to the sound number data is a collection of data indicating in time series the output mode of the sound effect or the sound in a predetermined effect period (for example, a fluctuation period of the effect symbol).

  Next, the operation of the gaming machine will be described. FIG. 32 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by the game control microcomputer 90560 on the main substrate 9031. When power is supplied to the gaming machine and power supply is started, the input level of the reset terminal to which the reset signal is input becomes high level, and the microcomputer for gaming control 90560 (specifically, the CPU 9056) After the security check process, which is a process for confirming whether the content of the program is valid, is performed, the main process after step S901 is started. In the main processing, the CPU 9056 first performs necessary initialization.

  In the initial setting process, the CPU 9056 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S901). Next, the interrupt mode is set to interrupt mode 2 (step S902), and a stack pointer designation address is set in the stack pointer (step S903). Then, after initialization of the built-in device (initialization of CTC (counter / timer) and PIO (parallel input / output port) which are built-in devices (built-in peripheral circuits), etc. (step S904), the RAM can be accessed (Step S905). In interrupt mode 2, the address synthesized from the value (1 byte) of the specific register (I register) built in the CPU 9056 and the interrupt vector (1 byte: least significant bit 0) output from the built-in device is This mode indicates the interrupt address.

  Next, the CPU 9056 confirms the state of the output signal (clear signal) of the clear switch (for example, mounted on the power supply substrate) input through the input port (step S906). When ON is detected in the confirmation, the CPU 9056 executes a normal initialization process (steps S9010 to S9015).

  If the clear switch is not in the ON state, it is checked whether data protection processing (for example, processing at the time of power supply stop such as addition of parity data) of the backup RAM area is performed when power supply to the gaming machine is stopped. (Step S907). After confirming that such protection processing has not been performed, the CPU 9056 executes initialization processing. Whether or not there is backup data in the backup RAM area is confirmed by, for example, the state of the backup flag set in the backup RAM area in the power supply stop processing.

  After confirming that the power supply stop processing has been performed, the CPU 9056 performs data check of the backup RAM area (step S 908). In this other embodiment, a parity check is performed as a data check. Therefore, in step S 908, the calculated checksum is compared with the checksum calculated and stored by the same process in the power supply stop process. If recovery is performed after a power supply stop such as an unexpected power failure occurs, the data in the backup RAM area should be saved, so the check result (comparison result) becomes normal (match). If the check result is not normal, it means that the data in the backup RAM area is different from the data at the time of the power supply interruption. In such a case, since the internal state can not be returned to the state at the time of the power supply stop, the initialization process executed at the time of power-on not at the time of recovery from the stop of the power supply is executed.

  If the check result is normal, the CPU 9056 returns the game state recovery processing to return the internal state of the game control means and the control state of the electric component control means such as the effect control means to the state at the time of the power supply stop (steps S9041 to S9043 Process). Specifically, the top address of the backup setting table stored in the ROM 9054 is set as a pointer (step S9041), and the contents of the backup setting table are sequentially set in the work area (area in the RAM 9055) (step S9042) ). The work area is backed up by a backup power supply. In the backup setting table, initialization data for an area that may be initialized in the work area is set. With the processing in steps S9041 and S9042, the saved content remains as it is for the portion of the work area that should not be initialized. The part that should not be initialized is, for example, data (special symbol process flag, positive change flag, time saving flag, etc.) indicating the gaming state before the power supply is stopped, the area where the output state of the output port is saved (output port buffer ), And a portion where data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls is set.

  Further, the CPU 9056 transmits a power failure recovery designation command as an initialization command at the time of power supply recovery (step S9043). In addition, the CPU 9056 transmits a display result designation command specifying the display result (normal big hit, positive variation big hit, sudden positive variation big hit, small hit or departure) stored in the backup RAM to the effect control board 9080 (step S9044). Then, the process proceeds to step S9014. In step S9044, when, for example, the value of the special symbol pointer described later is also stored in the backup RAM, the CPU 9056 also transmits the first symbol variation specification command and the second symbol variation specification command (see FIG. 36). You may do it. In this case, the effect control microcomputer 90100 may resume the variation display of the fourth symbol based on the reception of the first symbol variation specification command or the second symbol variation specification command.

  In the other embodiment, the backup RAM area also stores the value of the fluctuation time timer described later. Therefore, when the power failure is restored, after the display result designation command is transmitted in step S9044, the measurement of the value of the fluctuation time timer which has been saved is restarted, and the fluctuation display of the special symbol is resumed and saved. When the value of the fluctuation time timer which has been timed out, a symbol determination designation command to be described later is transmitted. Moreover, in this other embodiment, the value of the special symbol process flag described later is also stored in the backup RAM area. Therefore, when the power failure is recovered, the special symbol process processing is resumed from the process corresponding to the value of the stored special symbol process flag.

  It should be noted that the CPU 9056 may first check whether the value of the fluctuation time timer stored in the backup RAM area is 0 or not instead of transmitting the display result specification command at the time of power failure recovery. . Then, if the value of the fluctuation time timer is not 0, it is determined that a power failure occurs during fluctuation, and a display result designation command is transmitted. If the fluctuation time timer is 0, it is fluctuating at power failure. It may be determined not to be in the state, and the display result designation command may not be transmitted.

  The CPU 9056 may first check whether the value of the special symbol process flag stored in the backup RAM area is three. Then, if the value of the special symbol process flag is 3, it is determined that a power failure occurs during fluctuation, and a display result designation command is transmitted. If the special symbol process flag is not 3, it fluctuates at power failure. It may be determined that the display result designation command is not transmitted, judging that it is not inside.

  In this embodiment, although both the backup flag and the check data are used to confirm whether the data in the backup RAM area is stored or not, only one of them may be used. That is, either the backup flag or the check data may be used as a trigger for executing the gaming state recovery process.

  In the initialization process, the CPU 9056 first performs a RAM clear process (step S9010). In addition, predetermined data (for example, data of the count value of the counter for generating the random number per judgment for normal symbols) is initialized to 0 by the RAM clear process, but it is an arbitrary value or a predetermined value It may be initialized to In addition, predetermined data (for example, data of a count value of a counter for generating a random number per determination) may be left as it is without initializing the entire area of the RAM 9055. Also, the start address of the initialization setting table stored in the ROM 9054 is set as a pointer (step S9011), and the contents of the initialization setting table are sequentially set in the work area (step S9012).

  By the processing of steps S9011 and S9012, for example, a flag for determining processing selectively according to the control state, such as a random symbol counter for determination per normal symbol, special symbol buffer, total prize ball number storage buffer, special symbol process flag, etc. The value is set.

  Also, the CPU 9056 is an initialization designation command (a command indicating that the gaming control microcomputer 90560 has executed the initialization process) for initializing the sub board (the board on which the microcomputer other than the main board 9031 is mounted). ) To the sub-substrate (step S9013). For example, when the effect control microcomputer 90100 receives the initialization designation command, the effect display device 909 performs screen display for notifying that control of the gaming machine has been initialized, that is, initialization notification.

  The CPU 9056 also executes random number circuit setting processing to initialize the random number circuit 90503 (step S9014). The CPU 9056 performs, for example, processing in accordance with the random number circuit setting program to perform setting for causing the random number circuit 90503 to update the value of the random R ′.

  Then, in step S9015, the CPU 9056 performs setting of a register of CTC incorporated in the game control microcomputer 90560 so that timer interruption is periodically performed every predetermined time (for example, 4 ms). That is, a value corresponding to 4 ms, for example, is set as an initial value in a predetermined register (time constant register). In this other embodiment, it is assumed that a timer interrupt is periodically performed every 4 ms.

  When the execution of the initialization process (steps S9010 to S9015) is completed, the CPU 9056 repeatedly executes the display random number update process (step S9017) and the initial value random number update process (step S9018) in the main process. When executing display random number update processing and initial value random number update processing, interrupt disabled state is set (step S9016), and when display random number update processing and initial value random number update processing is completed, interrupt permitted state is set. The setting is made (step S9019). In this other embodiment, the display random number is a random number for determining the stop symbol of the special symbol when not being a big hit, and a random number for determining whether or not to be a reach when not being a big hit. The display random number update process is a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the display random number. The initial value random number updating process is a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number. In this other embodiment, the initial value random number is the initial value of the count value of a counter (normal pattern determination random number generation counter) for generating a random number for determining whether or not to hit a normal symbol. It is a random number to determine the value. The game control process for controlling the progress of the game to be described later (The game control microcomputer 90560 controls the game display devices such as the effect display device provided in the game machine, the variable winning ball device, the ball payout device, etc. by itself Count value of the random number for determination per normal pattern in the process of transmitting a command signal to control another microcomputer, or to control other microcomputers, the count value of the random number for determination per normal pattern is 1 round (take the random number for determination per normal pattern) When the value is advanced by the number of numerical values between the minimum value and the maximum value of the possible value, the initial value is set to the counter.

  When a timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 9056 executes the timer interrupt process of steps S9020 to S9034 shown in FIG. In the timer interrupt process, first, a power-down detection process is performed to detect whether or not the power-off signal is output (is turned on or not) (step S9020). The power-off signal is output, for example, when the power supply monitoring circuit mounted on the power supply substrate detects a drop in the voltage of the power supplied to the game machine. Then, in the power-off detection process, when the CPU 9056 detects that the power-off signal is output, the CPU 9056 executes a power-supply stop process for storing necessary data in the backup RAM area. Next, detection signals of the gate switch 9032a, the first start port switch 9013a, the second start port switch 9014a, and the count switch 9023 are input through the input driver circuit 9058, and the state of those is determined (switch processing: step S9021 ).

  Next, the CPU 9056 is a first special symbol display 908a, a second special symbol display 908b, an ordinary symbol display 9010, a first special symbol hold storage indicator 9018a, a second special symbol hold storage indicator 9018b, an ordinary symbol A display control process is performed to control the display of the hold storage indicator 9041 (step S9022). For the first special symbol display 908a, the second special symbol display 908b and the normal symbol display 9010, drive signals are outputted to each display according to the contents of the output buffer set in steps S9032 and S9033. Execute control.

  Further, processing is performed to update the count value of each counter for generating each determination random number, such as a normal symbol-performing determination random number used for game control (determination random number update process: step S9023). The CPU 9056 further performs processing of updating the initial value random number and the count value of the counter for generating the display random number (initial value random number updating process, display random number updating process: steps S9024, S9025).

  Further, the CPU 9056 performs special symbol process processing (step S9026). In the special symbol process processing, the corresponding processing is executed according to the special symbol process flag for controlling the first special symbol display 908a, the second special symbol display 908b and the special winning opening in a predetermined order. The CPU 9056 updates the value of the special symbol process flag in accordance with the gaming state.

  Then, a normal symbol process process is performed (step S9027). In the normal symbol process processing, the CPU 9056 executes the corresponding processing in accordance with the normal symbol process flag for controlling the display state of the normal symbol display 9010 in a predetermined order. The CPU 9056 updates the value of the normal symbol process flag in accordance with the gaming state.

  Further, the CPU 9056 performs a process of sending out the effect control command to the effect control microcomputer 90100 (effect control command control process: step S9028).

  Further, the CPU 9056 performs an information output process of outputting data such as big hit information, start information, probability fluctuation information and the like supplied to the hall management computer, for example (step S9029).

  The CPU 9056 executes an award ball process for setting the number of award balls based on detection signals of the first start opening switch 9013a, the second start opening switch 9014a, and the count switch 9023 (step S9030). Specifically, the payout control micro board mounted on the payout control board 9037 according to the winning detection based on any one of the first start port switch 9013a, the second start port switch 9014a, and the count switch 9023 being turned on. A payout control command (prize ball number signal) indicating the number of prize balls is output to the computer. The payout control microcomputer drives the ball payout device 9097 in accordance with the payout control command indicating the number of winning balls.

  In this other embodiment, for example, a game ball is won in the first start winning opening 9013 and the second starting winning opening 9014, and detection signals from the first starting opening switch 9013a and the second starting opening switch 9014a are used. In case of input, three winning balls shall be paid out. Further, for example, when the gaming ball is won in the special winning opening and the detection signal from the count switch 9023 is input, it is assumed that 15 winning balls are paid out.

  In this other embodiment, the RAM area (output port buffer) corresponding to the output state of the output port is provided. However, the CPU 9056 is configured to turn on / off the solenoid in the RAM area corresponding to the output state of the output port. The content regarding the off is output to the output port (step S9031: output processing).

  The CPU 9056 also performs special symbol display control processing for setting special symbol display control data for performing special symbol display according to the value of the special symbol process flag in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data ( Step S9032).

  Furthermore, the CPU 9056 performs normal symbol display control processing of setting normal symbol display control data for performing effect display of normal symbols according to the value of the normal symbol process flag in the output buffer for setting normal symbol display control data ( Step S9033). For example, when the start flag relating to the variation of the normal symbol is set, the CPU 9056 switches the display state ("o" and "x") every 0.2 seconds until the end flag is set. With such a speed, the value of the display control data (for example, 1 indicating "o" and 0 indicating "x") is switched every time 0.2 seconds elapse. Further, the CPU 9056 outputs a drive signal in step S9022 according to the display control data set in the output buffer, thereby executing effect display of a normal symbol in the normal symbol display 9010.

  Thereafter, the interrupt enabled state is set (step S34), and the process is ended.

  By the above control, in the other embodiment, the game control process is activated every 4 ms. The game control process corresponds to the process of steps S9021 to S9033 (except for step S9029) in the timer interrupt process. Further, in this other embodiment, the game control process is executed in the timer interrupt process, but in the timer interrupt process, for example, only the flag indicating that the interrupt has occurred is set, and the game control process is executed. It may be executed in the main process.

FIG. 34 is an explanatory view of each random number. Each random number is used as follows.
(1) Random 1 '(MR1'): Determines the type of big hit (normal big hit described later, definite positive big hit, sudden positive positive big hit) (for big hit type judgment)
(2) Random 2 '(MR 2'): Determine the type (type) of variation pattern (for variation pattern type determination)
(3) Random 3 '(MR3'): Determine fluctuation pattern (variation time) (for fluctuation pattern judgment)
(4) Random 4 '(MR 4'): Determine whether to generate a hit based on the normal symbol (for normal symbol determination)
(5) Random 5 '(MR 5'): Determine the initial value of random 4 '(for random 4' initial value determination)

  In step S9023 in the game control process shown in FIG. 33, the game control microcomputer 90560 is a counter for generating a jackpot type determination random number of (1) and a random number per normal symbol determination of (4). Perform count up (1 addition). That is, those are determination random numbers, and the other random numbers are display random numbers (random 2 ', random 3') or initial value random numbers (random 5 '). Note that random numbers other than the above random numbers may be used to enhance the gaming effect. Moreover, in this other embodiment, a random number generated by hardware (which may be hardware outside the gaming control microcomputer 90560) built in the gaming control microcomputer 90560 is used as a jackpot determination random number. . Note that software random numbers may be used instead of hardware random numbers as the jackpot determination random numbers.

  FIG. 35 (A) is an explanatory view showing a big hit determination table. The jackpot determination table is a group of data stored in the ROM 9054 and is a table in which a jackpot determination value to be compared with the random R ′ is set. The jackpot determination table includes a normal jackpot determination table used in a normal state and a short time state (that is, a gaming state that is not a definite change state), and a probability change time jackpot determination table used in a positive change state. Each numerical value described in the left column of FIG. 35 (A) is set in the normal time jackpot determination table, and each numerical value described in the right column of FIG. Is set. The numerical values described in FIG. 35A are the jackpot determination values.

  FIGS. 35 (B) and 35 (C) are explanatory views showing a small hitting determination table. The small hit determination table is a group of data stored in the ROM 9054 and is a table in which a small hit determination value to be compared with the random R ′ is set. In the small hit determination table, a small hit determination table (for the first special symbol) used when performing variable display of the first special symbol, and a small hit determination table used when performing the variable display of the second special symbol (For the second special symbol) and there. Each numerical value described in FIG. 35 (B) is set in the small hit determination table (for the first special symbol), and in the small hit determination table (for the second special symbol), in FIG. 35 (C) Each numerical value described is set. Further, the numerical values described in FIGS. 35B and 35C are small hit judgment values.

  The CPU 9056 extracts the count value of the random number circuit 90503 at a predetermined time, and sets the extracted value as the value of the big hit determination random number (random R '). If it matches with any of the shown big hit judgment values, it decides to make it a big hit (normal big hit, definite variation big hit, sudden positive variation big hit which will be described later) regarding the special symbol. If the jackpot determination random number value matches any of the small hit determination values shown in FIGS. 35 (B) and 35 (C), it is determined that the special symbol is to be a small hit. The “probability” shown in FIG. 35A indicates the probability (percentage) of becoming a big hit. The “probability” shown in FIGS. 35B and 35C indicates the probability (percentage) of being a small hit. In addition, deciding whether or not to make a big hit means deciding whether or not to shift to a big hit gaming state, but the stop symbol in the first special symbol display 908a or the second special symbol display 908b It is also to decide whether or not to make it a jackpot symbol. In addition, deciding whether or not to make a small hit is to decide whether or not to shift to a small hit gaming state, but the stop in the first special symbol display 908a or the second special symbol display 908b It is also to decide whether or not to make the symbol a small hit symbol.

  In this other embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 35 (B) and 35 (C), when using the small hit determination table (for the first special symbol), the small hit is made at a ratio of 1/300. In the case where the small hit determination table (second special symbol) is used, the case where the small hit is determined at a ratio of 1/3000 will be described. Therefore, in this other embodiment, when the first start winning opening 9013 is start winning, and the first special symbol variation display is executed, the second starting winning opening 9014 is start winning and the second special The percentage determined as "small hit" is high as compared with the case where the variable display of symbols is executed.

  FIGS. 35D and 35E are explanatory diagrams showing the jackpot type determination tables 90131 a and 90131 b stored in the ROM 9054. Among these, FIG. 35D determines the jackpot type using the suspension memory based on the game ball having won the first start winning opening 9013 (that is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed). It is a jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) 90131a of the case. Further, FIG. 35E shows the case where the jackpot type is determined using the suspension memory based on the game ball having won the second start winning opening 9014 (that is, when the variation display of the second special symbol is performed) Jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) 90131 b.

  The jackpot classification determination tables 90131a and 90131b "usually hit a jackpot classification" based on the random number (random 1 ') for jackpot classification determination when it is determined that the variable display result is to be a jackpot symbol. It is a table to be referred to in order to determine either "probable big hit" or "suddenly big hit". In the other embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 35 (D) and (E), five judgment values are assigned to the "sudden probability change big hit" in the big hit type determination table 90131a ( While it is determined that the probability variation big hit is sudden at the ratio of 5/40), one decision value is assigned to the “sudden probability variation big hit” in the big hit classification determination table 90131 b Suddenly, it is determined that the probability is a big hit. Therefore, in this other embodiment, when the first start winning opening 9013 is start winning, and the first special symbol variation display is executed, the second starting winning opening 9014 is start winning and the second special As compared with the case where the variable display of the symbol is executed, the rate at which the "sudden probability change big hit" is determined is high. "Suddenly probability variation big hit" is distributed only to the first special symbol big hit classification determination table 90131a, "suddenly probability variation big hit" is not distributed to the second special symbol big hit classification determination table 90131b (ie , And may be determined as "suddenly probability variation big hit" only when performing the variable display of the first special symbol).

  In this other embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 35 (D) and 35 (E), there are "normal big hit", "probably big hit" and "suddenly big hit" as the big hit types. Although this other embodiment shows the case where the number of rounds executed in the big hit game is two types of 15 rounds and 2 rounds, the number of rounds executed in the big hit game is the other execution It is not limited to what is shown in the form of. For example, a 10R probability variation big hit to control 10 rounds of big hit games, a 7R probability variation big hit to control 7 rounds of big hit games, a 5R probability variation big hit to control 5 rounds of big hit games may be provided. Moreover, in this other embodiment, although the case where big hit classification is three types, "normal big hit", "probably big hit" and "suddenly big hit", it is not limited to 3 types, for example, 4 types. The above jackpot type may be provided. Also, conversely, the jackpot type may be less than three types, for example, only two types may be provided as the jackpot type.

  The “normal big hit” is a big hit that is controlled to a big hit game state of 15 rounds and shifted to a time saving state only after the end of the big hit game state (see step S90167 described later). Then, after shifting to the time saving state, when the variable display is finished a predetermined number of times (100 times in the other embodiment), the time saving state is finished (see steps S90168 and S90137 to S90140). Note that, even before the variable display is ended a predetermined number of times, the time saving state is ended also when the next big hit occurs (see step S90132).

  "Perhaps a big hit" is a big hit that controls 15 rounds of big hit gaming state, and shifts to a positive changing state after the big hitting gaming state ends (in other embodiments, it is transferred to a positive changing state and a short time (Refer to steps S90169 and S90170 described later). Then, the positive change state and the short time state continue until the next big hit occurs (see step S90132).

  In addition, "Suddenly positive variation big hit" is the number of times the number of opening of the big winning opening is smaller than "normal big hit" or "positive variation big hit" (in the other embodiment, opening for 0.1 seconds twice) It is a jackpot that is acceptable. That is, in the case of "a sudden odd change big hit", it is controlled to a big hit gaming state of two rounds. Also, the opening time of the big winning opening per round is as long as 29 seconds in "normal big hit" and "probably big hit", while the opening time of big winning opening per round is "in sudden definite changing big hit" It is extremely short at 0.1 seconds, and it can hardly be expected that the game ball will win the big winning opening during the big hit game. And in this other embodiment, it shifts to a definite change state after the termination of the sudden odd change big hit game state (In this other embodiment, it shifts to a definite change state and also shifts to a short time state. (See steps S90169 and S90170). Then, the positive change state and the short time state continue until the next big hit occurs (see step S90132).

  Note that the aspect of the sudden positive hit is not limited to those shown in the other embodiments. For example, the opening number of the big winning opening may be 15 times (15 rounds) the same as that of the big hit or sudden odd variation big hit normally, and only the opening time of the big winning opening may be made extremely short such as 0.1 second.

  In this other embodiment, even in the case of "small hit", the opening of the big winning opening is performed twice for 0.1 second each, and the same control as the big hit gaming state by "suddenly positive variation big hit" Is done. Then, in the case of "small hit", after the opening of the special winning opening is finished, the gaming state does not change, and the gaming state before the "small hit" is maintained. By doing so, it is possible to make it impossible to recognize whether the game is a sudden sudden big hit or a small hit, thereby improving the interest of the game. In addition, it is not necessary to provide a small hit, when it is comprised so that all the big hit types may be a definite variation big hit. In addition, when it is configured to provide a small hit if all the big hit type is a definite variation big hit, it is transitioned to a definite variation state (high probability state) and a sudden definite variation big hit without a short time state (high base state) It is preferable that the opening pattern of the big winning opening be made the same for the big hit and the small hit suddenly.

  The jackpot type judgment tables 90131a and 90131b are numerical values to be compared with the value of the random 1 ', and the judgment values corresponding to "normal big hit", "probably variable big hit", and "suddenly odd variable big hit" (big hit type determination Value) is set. When the value of the random 1 'matches any of the big hit type determination values, the CPU 9056 determines the type of the big hit as the type corresponding to the matched big hit type determination value.

  FIG. 36 and FIG. 37 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the contents of the effect control command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 90560. In the example shown in FIG. 36 and FIG. 37, command 80XX (H) is a production control command (a variation pattern command for specifying a variation pattern of a production symbol that is variably displayed in ) (Each corresponding to fluctuation pattern XX). That is, when a unique number is assigned to each of the variation patterns that can be used, there is a variation pattern command corresponding to each of the variation patterns specified by the number. "(H)" indicates that it is a hexadecimal number. Further, the effect control command for specifying the fluctuation pattern is also a command for specifying the start of fluctuation. Therefore, when the command 80XX (H) is received, the effect control microcomputer 90100 controls the effect display device 909 to start variable display of the effect pattern.

  Commands 8C01 (H) to 8C05 (H) are effect control commands indicating whether or not to make a big hit, whether or not to make a small hit, and a type of big hit. Since the effect control microcomputer 90100 determines the display result of the effect pattern in response to the reception of the commands 8C01 (H) to 8C05 (H), the commands 8C01 (H) to 8C05 (H) are referred to as display result specification commands.

  The command 8D01 (H) is an effect control command (first symbol variation designation command) indicating that variable display (variation) of the first special symbol is started. The command 8D02 (H) is an effect control command (second symbol variation specification command) indicating that variable display (variation) of the second special symbol is started. The first symbol variation specification command and the second symbol variation specification command may be collectively referred to as a special symbol specification command (or a symbol variation specification command). Note that information indicating whether to start variable display of the first special symbol or to start variable display of the second special symbol may be included in the variation pattern command.

  The command 8F00 (H) is an effect control command (design confirmation designation command) indicating that the variable display (variation) of the fourth symbol is ended and the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. Upon receiving the symbol determination designation command, the effect control microcomputer 90100 ends the variable display (variation) of the fourth symbol and derives and displays the display result.

  The command 9000 (H) is an effect control command (initialization designation command: power on designation command) transmitted when power supply to the gaming machine is started. The command 9200 (H) is an effect control command (power failure recovery designation command) transmitted when the power supply to the gaming machine is resumed. When power supply to the gaming machine is started, the game control microcomputer 90560 transmits a power failure recovery designation command if data is stored in the backup RAM, and otherwise initialization designation is performed. Send a command

  The command 9F00 (H) is an effect control command (customer waiting demo specification command) for specifying a customer waiting demonstration.

  The commands A 001 and A 002 (H) are effect control commands (big hit start designation command: fan fare designation command) for displaying the fanfare screen, that is, the start of the big hit game. In this other embodiment, depending on the type of big hit, a big hit start command or a small hit / sudden probability change big hit start command is used. Specifically, the jackpot start designation command (A001 (H)) is used in the case of "normal big hit" or "probably big hit", and the small hit in the case of "suddenly big hit" or "small hit" The sudden definite big hit start specification command (A 002 (H)) is used. The game control microcomputer 90560 is configured to transmit the fanfare designation command for the sudden variation big hit start designation suddenly when it is a big hit, but not to send the fan fare designation command when it is a small hit. Good.

  The command A1XX (H) is an effect control command (a special winning opening open designation command) showing a display of a number of times (round) of the special winning opening opening indicated by XX. A2XX (H) is an effect control command (designated command after opening of the special winning opening) indicating the closing of the special winning opening for the number of times (round) indicated by XX.

  The command A 301 (H) is an effect control command (big hit end designation command: ending 1 designated command) for displaying the big hit end screen, that is, the end of the big hit game. The big hit end designation command (A301 (H)) is used when ending a big hit game by “normal big hit” or “probable big hit”. The command A 302 (H) is an effect control command (small hit / sudden definite positive big hit end designation command: ending 2 specified command) for specifying the end of the small hit game or the sudden end of the big hit. The game control microcomputer 90560 is configured to transmit the ending designation command for the sudden change big hit termination specification suddenly in the case of the sudden change big hit, but not to send the ending specification command in the case of the small hit. It is also good.

  The command A 400 (H) is an effect control command (large winning opening winning combination designation command) for designating that the winning of the gaming ball to the special winning opening has been detected.

  The command B 000 (H) is an effect control command (normal state background designating command) for specifying background display when the gaming state is the normal state. The command B 001 (H) is an effect control command (probable variation state background designation command) for designating a background display when the gaming state is the definite variation state. The command B 002 (H) is an effect control command (time saving state background specifying command) for specifying a background display when the gaming state is the time saving state.

  The command C000 (H) is an effect control command (first pending storage number addition designation command) for designating that the first pending storage number has increased by one. The command C100 (H) is an effect control command (second pending storage number addition designation command) for specifying that the second pending storage number has increased by one. The command C200 (H) is an effect control command (first pending storage number subtraction designation command) for designating that the first pending storage number has decreased by one. The command C300 (H) is an effect control command (second pending storage number subtraction designation command) for designating that the second pending storage number has decreased by one.

  In this other embodiment, the first pending storage number addition designation command, the second pending storage number addition designation command, the first pending storage number subtraction designation command, and the first pending storage number can be specified as the pending information capable of identifying the pending storage number. Although the case of transmitting the 2 pending storage number subtraction designation command has been shown, the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, as the hold information, an effect control command (first hold memory number specification command) for specifying the first hold memory number itself, and an effect control command for specifying the second hold memory number itself (second hold memory number specification command) May be configured to transmit. In addition, for example, as the holding information, a production control command (total holding memory number specifying command) for specifying a total number (total number of holding memories) which is the sum of the first holding memory number and the second holding memory number is transmitted You may configure it. In this case, when configured to transmit the combined reserve storage number designation information, for example, the effect control command (first start prize designation command) for designating that there is a first start prize, or the second start prize By transmitting the effect control command (the second start winning a prize specifying command) specifying that there is an event, so that it can be specified which of the first pending storage number and the second pending storage number has increased Good.

  The effect control microcomputer 90100 (specifically, the effect control CPU 90101) mounted on the effect control board 9080 receives the effect control command described above from the game control micro computer 90560 mounted on the main board 9031. Then, the display state of the effect display device 909 is changed according to the contents shown in FIGS. 36 and 37, the display state of the lamp is changed, and the sound number data is output to the sound output board 9070. Do.

  FIGS. 38 and 39 are flowcharts showing an example of a program of special symbol process processing (step S9026) executed by the game control microcomputer 90560 (specifically, the CPU 9056) mounted on the main substrate 9031. As described above, in the special symbol process processing, processing for controlling the first special symbol display 908a or the second special symbol display 908b and the special winning opening is executed. In the special symbol process processing, if the first starting opening switch 9013a for detecting that the gaming ball has won in the first starting winning opening 9013 is on in the special symbol process processing, that is, starting to the first starting winning opening 9013 If there is a winning, the first start port switch passing process is executed (steps S90311 and S90312). In addition, if the second start opening switch 9014a for detecting that the game ball has won in the second start winning opening 9014 is on, that is, the CPU 9056 has a start winning in the second start winning opening 9014. Then, the second start port switch passage process is executed (steps S90313 and S90314). Then, one of the processes in steps S90300 to S90310 is performed. If the first start port switch 9013a or the second start port switch 9014a is not turned on, one of steps S90300 to S90310 is performed according to the internal state.

  The processes of steps S90300 to S90310 are the following processes.

  Special symbol normal processing (step S90300): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 0. When the variable display of the special symbol can be started, the game control microcomputer 90560 confirms the number of stored numerical data (total number of held memories) stored in the hold memory buffer. The storage number of the numerical data stored in the storage buffer can be confirmed by the count value of the total storage number counter. Also, if the count value of the combined holding memory number counter is not 0, it is determined whether or not the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is considered as a big hit. In the case of a big hit, the big hit flag is set. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (1 in this example) according to step S90301. The big hit flag is reset when the big hit game is over.

  Fluctuation pattern setting processing (step S90301): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 1. Also, the fluctuation pattern is determined, and the fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern (variable display time: time from the start of variable display to the derivation display (stop display) of the display result) is the fluctuation time of the variable display of the special symbol Decide to do. Further, control is performed to transmit a variation pattern command corresponding to the determined variation pattern to the effect control microcomputer 90100, and a variation time timer for measuring the variation time of the special symbol is started. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (2 in this example) corresponding to step S90302.

  Display result designation command transmission processing (step S90302): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 2. Control for transmitting a display result designation command to the effect control microcomputer 90100 is performed. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (3 in this example) corresponding to step S90303.

  Special symbol variation processing (step S90303): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 3. When the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern selected in the fluctuation pattern setting process elapses (when the fluctuation time timer set in step S90301 times out, ie, the value of the fluctuation time timer becomes 0), the microcomputer 90100 for effect control is determined Control to transmit a designated command is performed, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (4 in this example) corresponding to step S90304. Note that the effect control microcomputer 90100 performs control so that the fourth symbol is stopped in the effect display device 909 when the symbol determination designation command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 90560 is received.

  Special symbol stop processing (step S90304): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 4. If the jackpot flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (5 in this example) corresponding to step S90305. If the small hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (8 in this example) corresponding to step S90308. If neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to step S90300. In this other embodiment, based on the fact that the value of the special symbol process flag is 4, the special symbol for stopping and displaying the stop symbol of the special symbol in the special symbol display control process, as will be described later. The display control data is set in the output buffer for special symbol display control data setting (see FIG. 49), and the stop symbol of the special symbol is actually stopped and displayed according to the setting contents of the output buffer in the display control processing of step S9022. .

  Special winning opening open processing (step S90305): is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is five. In the special winning opening open processing, control is performed to open the special winning opening. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of gaming balls that have entered the special winning opening) and the like are initialized, and the solenoid 9021 is driven to open the special winning opening. In addition, while performing control which transmits the special winning a prize opening opening designated command to the microcomputer 90100 for production control, the execution time of the special winning a prize opening opening processing is set with the timer, internal state (special symbol process flag) step S90306 Update to the value corresponding to (6 in this example). The big winning opening opening pre-processing is executed for each round, but when starting the first round, the big winning opening opening pre-processing is also processing for starting a big hit game. Further, since the special winning opening open designation command is transmitted with the value specifying the round set in the EXT data, the different special winning opening opening designation command is transmitted every round. For example, when executing the first round in the big hit game, the large winning opening opening designated command (A101 (H)) for specifying the round 1 is transmitted, and when executing the tenth round in the big hit game , A special winning opening opening specification command (A10A (H)) for specifying round 10 is transmitted.

  Large winning opening open processing (step S90306): is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 6. In the special winning opening open processing, processing for confirming the establishment of the closing condition of the special winning opening is performed. When the closing condition of the special winning opening is satisfied and there are still remaining rounds, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (5 in this example) corresponding to step S90305. In addition, while performing control which transmits the designated command after the opening in the big hit to the microcomputer 90100 for production control, when all rounds are finished, internal state (special symbol process flag) the value which corresponds to step S90307 (this value In the example, update to 7).

  Big hit end processing (step S90307): It is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 7. Control is performed to cause the effect control microcomputer 90100 to perform display control to notify the player that the big hit gaming state has ended. In addition, processing is performed to set a flag indicating the gaming state (for example, a probability change flag or a time saving flag). Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to step S90300.

  Small hit opening pre-processing (step S90308): is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 8. In the small hit opening pre-processing, control is performed to open the big winning opening. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of gaming balls that have entered the special winning opening) and the like are initialized, and the solenoid 9021 is driven to open the special winning opening. Further, the execution time of the special winning opening open process is set by the timer, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (9 in this example) corresponding to step S90309. In addition, small hit opening pre-processing is executed for each opening of the big winning opening in the small hit game, but when starting the first open in the small hit game, the small hit opening pre-processing is the small hit game It is also a process to start.

  Small hit open processing (step S90309): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is nine. Perform processing such as confirming the establishment of the closing condition of the special winning opening. If the closing condition of the special winning opening is satisfied and the opening number of the special winning opening still remains, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is set to the value (8 in this example) corresponding to step S90308. Update. In addition, when all opening is finished, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (10 in this example) corresponding to step S90310.

  Small hit end processing (step S90310): is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 10. Control is performed to cause the effect control microcomputer 90100 to perform display control to notify the player that the small hit gaming state has ended. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to step S90300.

  FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the starting opening switch passing process of steps S90312 and S90314. Among these, FIG. 40A is a flowchart showing the first starting opening switch passage process of step S90312. FIG. 40B is a flowchart showing the second starting opening switch passage process of step S90314.

  First, the first start port switch passage process will be described with reference to FIG. In the first starting opening switch passage process executed when the first starting opening switch 9013a is in the on state, the CPU 9056 first determines whether the first number of pending storages has reached the upper limit value (specifically, 1) Check whether or not the value of the first pending storage number counter for counting the pending storage number is 4) (step S901211A). If the first pending storage number has reached the upper limit value, the process ends.

  If the first pending storage number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 9056 increases the value of the first pending storage number counter by 1 (step S901212A) and the value of the total pending storage number counter for counting the total pending storage number Is increased by 1 (step S901213A).

  Next, the CPU 9056 extracts values from the random number circuit 90503 and the counter for generating software random numbers, and executes processing for storing them in the storage area of the first hold storage buffer (see FIG. 41) (step S901214A) . In the process of step S901214A, a hardware random number random R '(big hit determination random number), a software random number big hit type determination random number (random 1'), a variation pattern type determination random number (random 2 ') And a random number for fluctuation pattern determination (random 3 ') is extracted and stored in the storage area. It should be noted that the random pattern determination random number (random 3 ') is not extracted in the first starting opening switch passage process (during start winning) and stored in advance in the storage area, but extracted at the start of the first special symbol fluctuation You may do it. For example, the game control microcomputer 90560 may directly extract a value from a fluctuation pattern determination random number counter for generating a fluctuation pattern determination random number (random 3 ') in the fluctuation pattern setting process described later. .

  FIG. 41 is an explanatory view showing a configuration example of a region (pending storage buffer) for saving random numbers and the like corresponding to the pending storage. As shown in FIG. 41, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit (4 in this example) of the first number of pending storages is secured in the first pending storage buffer. In the second hold storage buffer, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit (4 in this example) of the second hold storage number is secured. In this other embodiment, the first holding storage buffer and the second holding storage buffer may be hardware random numbers random R '(big hit determination random numbers) or software random numbers jackpot type determination random numbers (random 1) '), A variation pattern type determination random number (random 2') and a variation pattern determination random number (random 3 ') are stored. The first pending storage buffer and the second pending storage buffer are formed in the RAM 9055.

  Next, the CPU 9056 performs control to transmit a first hold storage count addition designation command to the effect control microcomputer 90100 (step S901215A).

  Next, the second starting opening switch passage process will be described with reference to FIG. 40 (B). In the second starting opening switch passage process executed when the second starting opening switch 9014a is in the on state, the CPU 9056 determines whether the number of the second holding memories has reached the upper limit (specifically, the second holding) Whether or not the value of the second pending storage number counter for counting the storage number is 4) is confirmed (step S901211B). If the second pending storage number has reached the upper limit value, the process ends.

  If the second pending storage number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 9056 increases the value of the second pending storage number counter by 1 (step S901212B) and the value of the total pending storage number counter for counting the total pending storage number Is increased by 1 (step S901213B).

  Next, the CPU 9056 extracts values from the random number circuit 90503 and the counter for generating software random numbers, and executes processing for storing them in the storage area in the second hold storage buffer (see FIG. 41) (step S901214B) . In the process of step S901214B, a hardware random number random R '(big hit determination random number), a software random number big hit type determination random number (random 1'), a variation pattern type determination random number (random 2 ') And a random number for fluctuation pattern determination (random 3 ') is extracted and stored in the storage area. In addition, it does not extract the random number for fluctuation pattern judgment (random 3 ') in the 2nd starting opening switch passage processing (at the time of starting winning combination) and store in advance in the storage area, it is extracted at the start of fluctuation of the second special symbol You may do it. For example, the game control microcomputer 90560 may directly extract a value from a fluctuation pattern determination random number counter for generating a fluctuation pattern determination random number (random 3 ') in the fluctuation pattern setting process described later. .

  Next, the CPU 9056 performs control to transmit a second reserve storage number addition designation command to the effect control microcomputer 90100 (step S901215B).

  42 and 43 are flowcharts showing the special symbol normal processing (step S90300) in the special symbol process processing. In the special symbol normal processing, the CPU 9056 confirms the value of the total number of pending storages (step S9051). Specifically, it checks the count value of the combined pending storage number counter. If the total number of pending storages is 0, and if the customer waiting demo specification command has not been sent yet, control is performed to transmit the customer waiting demo specification command to the effect control microcomputer 90100 (step S9051A), finish. For example, when the CPU 9056 transmits the customer waiting demo specification command in step S9051A, the CPU 9056 sets a customer waiting demonstration specification command transmitted flag indicating that the customer waiting demo specification command has been transmitted. Then, when executing the special symbol normal processing after the next timer interruption after transmitting the customer waiting demo specification command, the customer waiting demonstration instruction command completed flag is set and the customer waiting is repeated. Control may be performed so as not to send a demo specification command. Also, in this case, the customer waiting demo specification command transmitted flag may be reset when the next time the variable display of the special symbol is started.

  If the total pending storage number is not 0, the CPU 9056 confirms the value of the second pending storage number (step S9052). Specifically, the value of the second pending storage number counter is confirmed. If the second pending storage number is not 0, the CPU 9056 is a special symbol pointer (a flag indicating whether the special symbol process processing is performed for the first special symbol or the special symbol process processing is performed for the second special symbol) The data which shows "the 2nd" is set to (step S9053). If the second number of pending storages is 0, the CPU 9056 sets data representing "first" in the special symbol pointer (step S9054).

  By performing the processing of steps S9052 to S9054, in this other embodiment, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed with priority over the variable display of the first special symbol. In addition, the variation display of the first special symbol and the variation display of the second special symbol in the winning sequence to the first start winning opening 9013 and the second start winning opening 9014 are not limited to the mode shown in this other embodiment. It may be configured to run.

  Next, the CPU 9056 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the pending storage number of one indicated by the special symbol pointer in the RAM 9055 and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 9055 (step S9055). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 9056 is a random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the first number of pending storages = 1 in the first pending storage buffer. Are read out and stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 9055. In addition, when the special symbol pointer indicates "the second", the CPU 9056 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second number of pending storages = 1 in the second pending storage buffer. It is stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 9055.

  Then, the CPU 9056 subtracts 1 from the count value of the reserved storage number counter of the one indicated by the special symbol pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (step S9056). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 9056 subtracts one from the count value of the first pending storage number counter, and for each saving area in the first pending storage buffer. Shift the content. If the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the count value of the second hold storage number counter is decremented by 1, and the contents of the respective save areas in the second hold storage buffer are shifted.

  That is, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 9056 is in the storage area corresponding to the first number of pending storages = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first pending storage buffer of the RAM 9055. The stored random number values are stored in the storage area corresponding to the first pending storage number = n-1. In addition, when the special symbol pointer indicates "the second", each stored in the storage area corresponding to the second number of pending storages = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second pending storage buffer of the RAM 9055 The random number value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second pending storage number = n-1.

  Therefore, the order in which the random number values stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the respective first pending storage numbers (or the respective second pending storage numbers) are extracted is always the first pending storage number (or It agrees with the order of the 2nd pending memory number) = 1, 2, 3, and 4.

  Then, the CPU 9056 decreases the value of the total number of pending storages by one. In other words, the count value of the total hold storage number counter is decremented by 1 (step S9058). Note that the CPU 9056 saves the value of the combined pending storage number counter before the count value is decremented by 1 in a predetermined area of the RAM 9055.

  Also, the CPU 9056 performs control to transmit a background designation command to the effect control microcomputer 90100 according to the current gaming state (step S9060). In this case, the CPU 9056 performs control to transmit a definite change state background designation command when a positive change flag indicating that the change is in the positive change state is set. Also, the CPU 9056 sets only the time-shortening flag indicating that the time-shortening state is set, and performs control to transmit a time-shortening state background designation command when the probability change flag is not set. Further, the CPU 9056 performs control of transmitting a normal state background designation command if neither the positive variation flag nor the short time flag is set.

  Specifically, when the CPU 9056 transmits the effect control command to the effect control microcomputer 90100, the address of the command transmission table (previously set for each command in the ROM) corresponding to the effect control command is used. Set to pointer. Then, the address of the command transmission table corresponding to the effect control command is set to the pointer, and the effect control command is transmitted in the effect control command control process (step S9028). In this other embodiment, when starting the variation of the special symbol, the background designation command, the variation pattern command, the display result designation command, the first hold storage number subtraction designation command or the second for each timer interrupt. It is transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 90100 in the order of the pending storage number subtraction designation command. Specifically, when starting the variation of the special symbol, first, the background designation command is sent, the variation pattern command is sent after 4 ms, the display result designation command is sent after 4 ms, and after 4 ms, The first pending storage number subtraction designation command or the second pending storage number subtraction designation command is transmitted. In addition, when starting the variation of the special symbol, the symbol variation specification command (1st symbol variation specification command, 2nd symbol variation specification command) is also transmitted, but the symbol variation specification command is the same timer interrupt as the variation pattern command Is transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 90100.

  In the special symbol normal processing, first, the data indicating the “first” indicating that the processing is executed targeting the first start winning opening 9013, that is, the processing indicating that the processing is executed targeting the first special symbol Data indicating "" or data indicating "second" indicating execution of processing for the second start winning opening 9014, that is, "second" indicating execution of processing for the second special symbol Data is set to the special symbol pointer. And in subsequent processing in special symbol process processing, processing according to data set to a special symbol pointer is performed. Therefore, the processing of steps S90300 to S90310 can be made common to the case of targeting the first special symbol and the case of targeting the second special symbol.

  Next, the CPU 9056 reads out the random R ′ (big hit determination random number) from the random number buffer area, and executes the big hit determination module. In this case, the CPU 9056 is for the jackpot determination extracted in step S901214A of the first start port switch passing process and step S901214B of the second start port switch passing process and stored in advance in the first holding storage buffer or the second holding storage buffer. Read the random number and make a big hit judgment. The big hit judgment module compares a predetermined big hit judgment value or small hit judgment value (refer to FIG. 35) with the big hit judgment random number, and executes processing to decide to make a big hit or a small hit if they match. Is a program that That is, it is a program that executes the process of the big hit determination and the small hit determination.

  In the process of the big hit determination, when the gaming state is a definite change state, the probability of becoming a big hit is higher than in the case where the gaming state is a non-deterministic change state (normal state or time saving state). Specifically, the probability variation time big hit determination table (the table in the ROM 9054 in which the numerical value on the right side of FIG. 35A is set) in which the number of big hit determination values is set in advance is large A normal-time big-hit determination table (a table in which the numerical value on the left side of FIG. 35A in the ROM 9054 is set) set smaller than the time-big hit determination table is provided. Then, the CPU 9056 confirms whether or not the gaming state is a definite change state, and when the gaming state is a definite change state, processing of the determination of the big hit using the big change determination table at the positive change time, the gaming state is normal When it is in the state, processing of the determination of the big hit is performed using the big hit determination table at the normal time. That is, when the value of the jackpot determination random number (random R ') matches any of the jackpot determination values shown in FIG. 35A, the CPU 9056 determines to set the jackpot for the special symbol. If it is determined to be a big hit (step S9061), the process proceeds to step S9071. In addition, deciding whether or not to make a big hit means to decide whether or not to shift to a big hit gaming state, but to decide whether to make a stop symbol in a special symbol display as a big hit symbol or not It is also.

  In addition, confirmation of whether the present game state is a definite change state is performed by whether the positive change flag is set. The probability change flag is set when shifting the gaming state to the probability change state, and is reset when ending the probability change state. Specifically, it is determined to be “probably big hit” or “suddenly big hit” and is set in the process of ending the big hit game. And, after the big hit game end, it is reset when the next big hit occurs.

  If the value of the jackpot determination random number (random R ') does not match any of the jackpot determination values (N in step S9061), the CPU 9056 checks the small hit determination table (see FIGS. 35B and 35C). Use it to process small hits. That is, when the value of the jackpot determination random number (random R ') matches any of the small hit determination values shown in FIGS. 35 (B) and (C), the CPU 9056 determines that the special symbol is to be a small hit. . In this case, the CPU 9056 confirms the data indicated by the special symbol pointer, and when the data indicated by the special symbol pointer is "first", the small hit determination table (for the first special symbol shown in FIG. 35B) Use) to decide whether to make a small hit or not. Also, when the data indicated by the special symbol pointer is "second", it is determined whether or not to be a small hit using the small hit determination table (for the second special symbol) shown in FIG. 35 (C). . Then, if it is determined to be a small hit (step S9062), the CPU 9056 sets a small hit flag indicating a small hit (step S9063), and proceeds to step S9075.

  If the value of the random R ′ does not match either the big hit determination value or the small hit determination value (N in step S9062), that is, if it is a loss, the process directly proceeds to step S9075.

  In step S9071, the CPU 9056 sets a big hit flag indicating that it is a big hit. Then, the big hit type determination table indicated by the special symbol pointer is selected as a table used to determine the big hit type to any one of a plurality of types (step S9072). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 9056 selects the jackpot type determination table 90131a for the first special symbol shown in FIG. 35 (D). Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates the "second", the CPU 9056 selects the big hit type determination table 90131 b for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 35 (E).

  Next, using the selected jackpot type determination table, the CPU 9056 uses the type ("normal jackpot") corresponding to the value matching the value of the random number (random 1 ') for jackpot type determination stored in the random number buffer area. A definite variation big hit "or" suddenly definite variation big hit "is determined as the type of big hit (step S9073). In this case, the CPU 9056 determines the big hit type which is extracted in step S901214A of the first start port switch passing process and step S901214B of the second start port switch passing process and stored in advance in the first holding storage buffer and the second holding storage buffer. Read the random number and decide the big hit type. Moreover, in this case, as shown in FIGS. 35 (D) and (E), when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, it is compared with the case where the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. Suddenly, the probability that a big hit is selected is high.

  The CPU 9056 also sets data indicating the determined type of big hit in the big hit type buffer in the RAM 9055 (step S 9074). For example, when the big hit type is "normal big hit", "01" is set as data indicating the big hit type, and when the big hit type is "probable variation big hit", "02" is set as data indicating the big hit type, When the big hit type is "suddenly, there is a definite variation big hit", "03" is set as data indicating the big hit type.

  Next, the CPU 9056 determines the stop symbol of the special symbol (step S 9075). Specifically, when neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set, "-" which is an out pattern is determined as the stop symbol of the special symbol. When the big hit flag is set, according to the determination result of the big hit type, it decides the stop design of the special symbol “1”, “3”, “7” which becomes the big hit symbol. That is, when the big hit type is determined to be "suddenly positive variation big hit", "1" is determined to be the stop symbol of the special symbol, and when "big hit" is determined, the "3" is determined to be the stop symbol of the special symbol And, when it is decided to be "probable variation big hit", "7" is decided to be the stop symbol of the special symbol. When the small hit flag is set, the small hit symbol "5" is determined as the special symbol stop symbol.

  In this other embodiment, the big hit type is determined first, and the case of determining the stop symbol of the special symbol corresponding to the determined big hit type is shown, but the method of determining the stop symbol of the big hit type and the special symbol is The present invention is not limited to those described in the other embodiments. For example, a table in which the stop symbol of the special symbol and the big hit type are associated in advance is prepared, and the stop symbol of the special symbol is first determined based on the big hit type determination random number, the corresponding big hit based on the determination result The type may also be determined.

  Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S90301) (step S9076).

  FIG. 44 is a flow chart showing fluctuation pattern setting processing (step S90301) in the special symbol process processing. In the fluctuation pattern setting process, the CPU 9056 first confirms whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S9081). When the jackpot flag is set, the CPU 9056 selects one of the jackpot fluctuation pattern type determination tables as a table used to determine the fluctuation pattern type to any one of a plurality of types (step S9082). Then, the process proceeds to step S9090.

  If the big hit flag is not set, the CPU 9056 checks whether the small hit flag is set (step S9083). If the small hit flag is set, the CPU 9056 selects the small hit variation pattern type determination table as a table used to determine the variation pattern type to any one of a plurality of types (step S9084). ). Then, the process proceeds to step S9090.

  If the small hit flag is not set either, the CPU 9056 confirms whether the time short flag indicating that the time short state is set (step S 9085). Note that the time saving flag is set when the gaming state is shifted to a definite changing state or a time saving state, and is reset when the time saving state is ended. Specifically, when it is determined to be "normally a big hit", the time saving flag is set in the process of ending the big hit game. In addition, it is reset when the variable display of a predetermined number of times (100 times in this other embodiment) is ended after the big hit game end. The time saving flag is reset even when the next big hit occurs even before the predetermined number of times of variation display ends. In addition, when it is determined to be "probably big hit" or "suddenly big hit", the probability flag is set and the time saving flag is set in the processing for ending the big hit game. Then, when the next big hit occurs, the time saving flag is reset together with the probability change flag.

  If the time saving flag is not set (N in step S 9085), the CPU 9056 confirms whether the total number of pending storages is 3 or more (step S 9086). If the total number of pending storages is less than 3 (N in step S 9086), the CPU 9056 determines the fluctuation pattern type for normal use as a table used to determine the fluctuation pattern type to any one of a plurality of types. A table is selected (step S9087). Then, the process proceeds to step S9090.

  If the total number of pending storages is 3 or more (Y in step S 9086), the CPU 9056 uses the variation pattern for shortening as a table used to determine the variation pattern type to any one of a plurality of types. The type determination table is selected (step S9088). Then, the process proceeds to step S9090.

  If the time saving flag is set (Y in step S9085), that is, if the gaming state is a definite change state or a short time state (in other embodiments, the time change is always made when transitioning to the positive change state) Since the state is also shifted (refer to steps S90169, S90170), if Y is determined in step S9085, the CPU 9056 may change the state depending on whether it is a positive change state or a short time state. As a table used to determine the pattern type to any one of a plurality of types, a time-saving variation pattern type determination table for time reduction is selected (step S9089). Then, the process proceeds to step S9090.

  In this other embodiment, when the gaming state is normal and the total number of pending storages is three or more by executing the processing of steps S9085 to S9089, the variation pattern type for loss for shortening A decision table is selected. Further, when the gaming state is a definite change state or a short time state, a time-shortening change pattern type determination table for short time is selected. In this case, a variation pattern type including a variation pattern of shortening variation may be determined as a variation pattern type in the process of step S9090 described later, and a variation pattern type including a variation pattern of shortening variation is determined, In the process of step S9092, the fluctuation pattern of the shortening fluctuation is determined as the fluctuation pattern. Therefore, in this other embodiment, the fluctuation display of the shortening fluctuation may be performed when the gaming state is a definite change state or a short time state, or when the total number of pending storages is three or more.

  Next, the CPU 9056 reads out random 2 '(random pattern type determination random number) from the random number buffer area (the first holding storage buffer or the second holding storage buffer), and selects it in the processing of steps S9082, S9084, S9087, S9088 or S9089. The variation pattern type is determined to be any one of a plurality of types by referring to the table (step S9090).

  Next, the CPU 9056 is a table used to determine the variation pattern to any one of a plurality of types based on the determination result of the variation pattern type in step S9090: a hit variation pattern determination table, an out of line variation pattern determination table One of them is selected (step S9091). Also, by reading random 3 '(random pattern determination random number) from the random number buffer area (first reserve storage buffer or second reserve storage buffer), the variation is determined by referring to the variation pattern determination table selected in the process of step S9091. The pattern is determined to be one of a plurality of types (step S9092). In addition, when it is comprised so that random 3 '(random number for fluctuation pattern determination) may not be extracted at the timing of starting winning a prize, CPU 9056 is for fluctuation pattern judgment for producing | generating the random number for fluctuation pattern determination (random 3'). The value may be directly extracted from the random number counter, and the variation pattern may be determined based on the extracted random value.

  Next, the CPU 9056 performs control to transmit the symbol variation designation command of the one indicated by the special symbol pointer to the effect control microcomputer 90100 (step S9093). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 9056 performs control to transmit a first symbol variation specification command. In addition, when the special symbol pointer indicates "the second", the CPU 9056 performs control to transmit a second symbol variation specification command. Further, the CPU 9056 performs control to transmit the effect control command (the change pattern command) corresponding to the determined change pattern to the effect control microcomputer 90100 (step S9094).

  Next, the CPU 9056 sets a value corresponding to the fluctuation time corresponding to the selected fluctuation pattern to the fluctuation time timer formed in the RAM 9055 (step S9095). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the display result designating command transmission process (step S90302) (step S9096).

  FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing a display result designation command transmission process (step S90302). In the display result designation command transmission process, the CPU 9056 transmits one of the effect control command (see FIG. 36) of the display result 1 specification to the display result 5 specification according to the determined type, small hit, or removal of the determined big hit. Control to Specifically, the CPU 9056 first confirms whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S90120). If not set, the process proceeds to step S90126. When the jackpot flag is set, if the type of the jackpot is "normal jackpot", control is performed to transmit the display result 2 designation command (steps S90121, S90122). In addition, it can be determined by checking whether the data set in the big hit type buffer in step S 9074 of the special symbol normal processing is “01” specifically, whether it is “normal big hit” or not . Further, when the type of the big hit is “probable variation big hit”, the CPU 9056 performs control to transmit a display result 3 designation command (steps S90123 and S90124). In addition, it can be determined by checking whether or not the data set in the big hit type buffer in step S9074 of the special symbol normal processing is "02", specifically, whether it is a "probable big hit" or not. . If neither the “normal big hit” nor the “probable big hit” (ie, it is “suddenly big hit”), the CPU 9056 performs control to transmit a display result 4 designation command (step S90125).

  On the other hand, when the big hit flag is not set (N in step S90120), the CPU 9056 checks whether the small hit flag is set (step S90126). If the small hit flag is set, the CPU 9056 performs control to transmit a display result 5 designation command (step S90127). When the small hit flag is not set (N in step S90126), that is, when the small hit flag is out, the CPU 9056 performs control to transmit the display result 1 designation command (step S90128).

  Then, the CPU 9056 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol variation process (step S90303) (step S90129).

  FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation in progress processing (step S90303) in the special symbol process processing. In the special symbol variation process, the CPU 9056 first confirms whether or not the first reserve storage number subtraction designation command or the second retention storage number subtraction designation command has already been transmitted (step S901121). Note that whether or not the first pending storage number subtraction designation command or the second pending storage number subtraction designation command has already been transmitted, for example, in step S901122 described later, the first pending storage number subtraction designation command or the second pending storage When transmitting the number subtraction specification command, the pending storage number subtraction specification command transmitted flag indicating that the first holding storage number subtraction specification command or the second holding storage number subtraction specification command has been transmitted is set, and in step S901121 Then, it may be checked whether the pending storage number subtraction designation command transmitted flag is set or not. Also, in this case, the set storage number subtraction designated command transmitted flag is reset by the special symbol stop processing or the big hit end processing described later when the variation display of the special symbol is finished or the big hit is finished. Just do it.

  Then, if the first reserve storage number subtraction designation command or the second retention storage number subtraction designation command has not been sent, the CPU 9056 causes the retention storage number subtraction designation command of the special symbol pointer to be displayed on the microcomputer 90100 for effect control. Control to be sent to the client (step S901122). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 9056 performs control to transmit a first storage reserve number subtraction designation command. In addition, when the special symbol pointer indicates "the second", the CPU 9056 performs control to transmit a second reserve storage number subtraction designation command.

  Next, the CPU 9056 subtracts 1 from the fluctuation time timer (step S901125), and when the fluctuation time timer times out (step S901126), performs control to transmit a symbol determination specification command to the effect control microcomputer 90100 (step S901127). Then, the CPU 9056 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol stop process (step S90304) (step S901128). If the fluctuation time timer has not timed out, the process ends.

  FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing special symbol stop processing (step S90304) in the special symbol process processing. In the special symbol stop process, the CPU 9056 confirms whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S90131). If the jackpot flag is set, if it is set, the CPU 9056 is a probability change flag indicating that it is a positive change state, a short time flag indicating that it is a short time state, and the number of times the special symbol can be changed in the short time state Is reset (step S90132), and control is performed to transmit a jackpot start designation command to the effect control microcomputer 90100 (step S90133). Specifically, when the type of the jackpot is “normal jackpot” or “probable jackpot”, the jackpot start designation command (command A 001 (H)) is transmitted. Also, when the type of the big hit is a sudden definite big hit, a small hit / sudden positive big hit start specification command (command A 002 (H)) is transmitted. In addition, data indicating the big hit type stored in the RAM 9055 (data stored in the big hit type buffer) whether the big hit type is “normal big hit”, “probably big hit” or “suddenly big hit” It is determined based on

  Further, the CPU 9056 sets a value corresponding to the big hit display time (for example, a time for notifying that the big hit has occurred in the effect display device 909) in the big winning opening open before timer (step S90134). In addition, the number of opening times (for example, 15 times in the case of "normal big hit" or "probably big hit". 2 times in "suddenly big hit") is set in the special winning opening open number counter (step S90135) . In addition, round time per round in the big hit game is also set. Specifically, in the case of a sudden odd change big hit, 0.1 second is set as a round time, and in the case of a normal big hit or a positive change big hit, 29 seconds is set as a round time. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special winning opening opening pre-processing (step S90305) (step S90136).

  If the big hit flag is not set in step S90131, the CPU 9056 confirms whether or not the value of the hour counting counter indicating the number of times the special symbol can be varied in the time saving state is 0 (step S90137). If the value of the time saving number counter is not 0, the CPU 9056 decrements the value of the time saving number counter by 1 (step S90138). Then, when the value of the time reduction number counter after subtraction becomes 0 (step S90139), the CPU 9056 resets the time reduction flag (step S90140).

  Next, the CPU 9056 confirms whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S90141). If the small hit flag is set, the CPU 9056 transmits a small hit / suddenly probability variation big hit start designation command (command A 002 (H)) to the effect control microcomputer 90100 (step S90142). Further, the CPU 9056 sets a value corresponding to the small hit display time (for example, a time for notifying that the small hit has occurred in the effect display device 909) in the big winning opening open before timer (step S90143). Further, the number of times of opening (for example, twice) is set in the special winning opening open number counter (step S90144). In addition, the opening time per large winning opening in the small hit game is also set. Specifically, the same 0.1 second as the round time of the sudden big change big hit is set as the open time per one big winning opening in the small hit game. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small hitting start pre-processing (step S90308) (step S90145).

  If the small hit flag is not set (N in step S90141), the CPU 9056 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing (step S90300) (step S90146).

  FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the jackpot end process (step S90307) in the special symbol process process. In the big hit end process, the CPU 9056 confirms whether or not the big hit end display timer is set (step S90160), and when the big hit end display timer is set, the process proceeds to step S90164. If the big hit end display timer is not set, the big hit flag is reset (step S90161), and control to transmit a big hit end designation command is performed (step S90162). Here, a "big hit" or "probably big hit" sends a big hit end designation command (command A 301 (H)), and if it is "suddenly big hit" a small hit / sudden positive big hit The end designation command (command A 302 (H)) is transmitted. Then, a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time during which the big hit end display is performed in the effect display device 909 (big hit end display time) is set in the big hit end display timer (step S90163), and the process is ended.

  In step S90164, the value of the big hit end display timer is decremented by 1 (step S90164). Then, the CPU 9056 confirms whether or not the value of the big hit end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the big hit end display time has elapsed (step S90165). If it has not, the process is ended.

  If the big hit end display time has elapsed (Y in step S90165), the CPU 9056 confirms whether or not the big hit to be finished this time is a normal big hit (step S90166). In addition, it can be determined by checking whether the data set in the big hit type buffer in step S 9074 of the special symbol normal processing is “01” specifically, whether it is “normal big hit” or not . If it is a normal big hit, the CPU 9056 sets the time saving flag and shifts to the time saving state (step S90167). Further, the CPU 9056 sets the time reduction number counter a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) (step S90168).

  Usually, if it is not a big hit (ie, if it is a definite variation big hit or sudden definite variation big hit), the CPU 9056 sets a definite variation flag and shifts to a definite variation state (step S90169), and sets a time saving flag to shift to a short time status (Step S90170).

  Then, the CPU 9056 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing (step S90300) (step S90171).

  FIG. 49 is a flow chart showing an example of a program of special symbol display control processing (step S9032) executed by the game control microcomputer 90560 (specifically, the CPU 9056) mounted on the main substrate 9031. In the special symbol display control process, the CPU 9056 confirms whether the value of the special symbol process flag is 3 or not (step S903201). If the value of the special symbol process flag is 3 (that is, if the special symbol variation processing is being executed), the CPU 9056 sets the special symbol display control data for the special symbol variation display for the special symbol display control data setting. A process of setting or updating the output buffer is performed (step S903202). In this case, the CPU 9056 sets or updates special symbol display control data for performing variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) indicated by the special symbol pointer. For example, if the changing speed is 1 frame / 0.2 seconds, the value of the special symbol display control data set in the output buffer is incremented by 1 each time 0.2 seconds elapses. Then, display control processing (see step S9022) is executed, and drive signals are output to the special symbol displays 908a and 908b according to the contents of the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data. The variation display of the special symbol in the special symbol display 908a, 908b is executed.

  If the value of the special symbol process flag is not 3, the CPU 9056 confirms whether the value of the special symbol process flag is 4 or not (step S903203). If the value of the special symbol process flag is 4 (that is, when transition to special symbol stop processing), the CPU 9056 is a special symbol for stopping and displaying the stop symbol of the special symbol set in the special symbol normal processing. A process of setting display control data in an output buffer for special symbol display control data setting is performed (step S903204). In this case, the CPU 9056 sets special symbol display control data for stopping and displaying the stop symbol of the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) indicated by the special symbol pointer. Then, display control processing (see step S9022) is executed, and drive signals are output to the special symbol displays 908a and 908b according to the contents of the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data. The stop symbol of the special symbol is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display 908a, 908b.

  Next, the operation of the effect control means will be described. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the effect control microcomputer 90100 (specifically, the effect control CPU 90101) as effect control means mounted on the effect control board 9080. When the power is turned on, the effect control CPU 90101 starts execution of the main processing. In the main processing, first, initialization processing is performed to clear the RAM area, set various initial values, and initialize the timer for determining the start interval (for example, 4 ms) of effect control (step S90701). .

  Thereafter, the effect control CPU 90101 shifts to loop processing to monitor the timer interrupt flag (step S90702). When a timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 90101 sets a timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt process. In the main processing, when the timer interrupt flag is set, the effect control CPU 90101 clears the flag (step S90703), and executes the following effect control processing.

  In the effect control process, first, the effect control CPU 90101 analyzes the received effect control command, and performs a process of setting a flag according to the received effect control command (command analysis process: step S90704).

  Next, the effect control CPU 90101 performs effect control process processing (step S90705). In the effect control process, among the processes corresponding to the control state, the process corresponding to the current control state (effect control process flag) is selected to execute display control of the effect display device 909.

  Next, the effect control CPU 90101 performs a fourth symbol process process (step S90706). In the fourth symbol process processing, among the processes corresponding to the control state, the processing corresponding to the current control state (the fourth symbol process flag) is selected and the fourth symbol display areas 909c and 909d of the effect display device 909 are selected. Execute the display control of the fourth symbol.

  Next, random number update processing is performed to update the count value of the counter for generating a random number such as a jackpot symbol determination random number (step S90707). Then, it transfers to step S90702.

  FIG. 51 is an explanatory view showing one configuration example of a command reception buffer for storing the effect control command received from the game control microcomputer 90560 of the main substrate 9031. As shown in FIG. In this example, a ring buffer type command reception buffer capable of storing six 2-byte effect control commands is used. Therefore, the command reception buffer is formed of a 12-byte area of the reception command buffers 1-12. Then, a command reception number counter indicating which area the received command is to be stored is used. The command reception number counter takes a value of 0-11. The ring buffer type may not necessarily be used.

  FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing a specific example of the command analysis process (step S90704). Although the effect control command received from the main substrate 9031 is stored in the reception command buffer, in the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 90101 confirms the content of the command stored in the command reception buffer.

  In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 90101 first confirms whether a reception command is stored in the command reception buffer (step S90611). Whether or not it is stored is determined by comparing the value of the command reception number counter with the read pointer. The case where the two match each other is the case where the reception command is not stored. If the reception command is stored in the command reception buffer, the effect control CPU 90101 reads the reception command from the command reception buffer (step S90612). Note that when read out, the value of the read pointer is incremented by 2 (step S90613). The reason for +2 is that two bytes (one command) are read at a time.

  If the received effect control command is a change pattern command (step S90614), the effect control CPU 90101 stores the received change pattern command in the change pattern command storage area formed in the RAM (step S90615). Then, the fluctuation pattern command reception flag is set (step S90616).

  If the received effect control command is the display result designation command (step S90617), the effect control CPU 90101 forms the received display result designation command (display result 1 designation command to display result 5 designation command) in the RAM. The command is stored in the display result designation command storage area (step S90618).

  If the received effect control command is the symbol determination specification command (step S90619), the effect control CPU 90101 sets a determination command reception flag (step S90620).

  If the received effect control command is a big hit start designation command (step S90621), the CPU for effect control 90101 sets a big hit start designation command reception flag (step S90622).

  If the received effect control command is a small hit / suddenly definite oddity big hit start designation command (step S90623), the CPU for effect control 90101 sets a small hit / sudden definite positive big hit start designation command reception flag (step S90624).

  If the received effect control command is a big hit end designation command (step S90625), the effect control CPU 90101 sets a big hit end designation command reception flag (step S90626).

  If the received effect control command is a small hit / suddenly a definite oddity big hit end designation command (step S90627), the CPU for effect control 90101 sets a small hit / a sudden definite big hit end designation command reception flag (step S90628).

  If the received effect control command is another command, the effect control CPU 90101 sets a flag corresponding to the received effect control command (step S90629). Then, the process proceeds to step S90611.

  FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing an effect control process (step S90705) in the main process shown in FIG. In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 90101 performs one of steps S90800 to S90807 in accordance with the value of the effect control process flag. In each process, the following process is performed. In the effect control process, the display state of the effect display device 909 is controlled, and variable display of the effect symbol is realized, but the control regarding variable display of effect symbol synchronized with the fluctuation of the first special symbol is also the second Control relating to variable display of the rendering symbol synchronized with the variation of the special symbol is also executed in one rendering control process.

  Fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process (step S90800): It is confirmed whether or not the fluctuation pattern command is received from the gaming control microcomputer 90560. Specifically, it is checked whether or not the variation pattern command reception flag set in the command analysis process is set. If the variation pattern command has been received, the value of the effect control process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the effect pattern variation start process (step S90801).

  Effect pattern fluctuation start process (step S90801): Control is performed so that the change of effect pattern is started. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol process (step S90802).

  Process during production symbol fluctuation (step S90802): While controlling the switching timing and the like of each fluctuation state (variation speed) constituting the fluctuation pattern, the end of fluctuation time is monitored. Then, when the fluctuation time is over, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol fluctuation stop process (step S90803).

  Effect pattern fluctuation stop processing (step S90803): Stop the fluctuation of the effect pattern and perform control to derive and display the display result (stop pattern). Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit display process (step S90804) or the fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process (step S90800).

  Big hit display process (step S90804): After the end of the fluctuation time, control is performed to display a screen for reporting the occurrence of a big hit on the effect display device 909. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the in-round process (step S90805).

  In-round process (step S90805): Display control in the round is performed. Then, when the round end condition is satisfied, if the final round is not ended, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the post round process (step S90806). If the final round has ended, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit end process (step S90807).

  Post-round processing (step S90806): Perform display control between rounds. Then, when the round start condition is satisfied, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the process during the round (step S90805).

  Big hit end effect processing (step S90807): In the effect display device 909, display control is performed to notify the player that the big hit gaming state has ended. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process (step S90800).

  FIG. 54 is a flow chart showing a fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process (step S90800) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process, the effect control CPU 90101 confirms whether or not the fluctuation pattern command reception flag is set (step S90811). If the fluctuation pattern command reception flag is set, the fluctuation pattern command reception flag is reset (step S90812). Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation start process (step S90801) (step S90813).

  FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol variation start process (step S90801) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the effect symbol variation start process, the effect control CPU 90101 first reads a change pattern command from the change pattern command storage area (step S 908000). Next, the effect control CPU 90101 displays the effect pattern (stopped) according to the variation pattern command read in step S 908000 and the data stored in the display result designating command storage area (that is, the received display result designating command) The symbol) is determined (step S908001). In addition, when pseudo run is designated by the change pattern command, CPU90101 for production control is the chance eye design (for example, "223" and "445" etc.) as a temporary stop symbol of a pseudo run in step S908001. Also, although it is not a reach, a combination of a big hit symbol and a symbol whose one symbol is off is also determined. The effect control CPU 90101 stores data indicating a stop symbol of the determined effect symbol in the effect symbol display result storage area.

  FIG. 56 is an explanatory view showing an example of the stop symbol of the effect symbol in the effect display device 909. As shown in FIG. In the example shown in FIG. 56, when the received display result designation command indicates “normal big hit” (when the received display result designation command is the display result 2 designation command), the effect control CPU 90101 is stopped. Determine the combination of the production design that the 3 designs are aligned with the same even design as the design. In addition, when the received display result designation command indicates "a certainty big hit" (when the received display result designation command is the display result 3 designation command), the effect control CPU 90101 has 3 symbols as a stop symbol. Determine the combination of the production symbols aligned with the same odd symbols.

  Also, if the received display result specification command indicates "Suddenly positive probability big hit" or "small hit" (if the received display result specification command is the display result 4 specification command or the display result 5 specification command), The effect control CPU 90101 determines a combination of effect symbols such as “135” as a stop symbol. Then, in the case of “off” (when the received display result designation command is the display result 1 designation command), a combination of effect symbols other than the above is determined. However, when it is accompanied by the reach effect, the combination of the effect pattern with the two left and right symbols aligned is determined. Further, the combination of three symbols derived and displayed on the effect display device 909 is the "stop symbol" of the effect symbol.

  The effect control CPU 90101, for example, extracts a random number for determining a stop symbol, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which data indicating combinations of effect symbols are associated with numerical values, the stop symbol of the effect symbol decide. That is, the stop symbol is determined by selecting the data indicating the combination of the effect symbols corresponding to the numerical value corresponding to the extracted random number.

  In addition, also about a production pattern, it is called a big hit design the stop pattern (combination of the symbols in which the left middle and the right are all aligned with the same design) that evokes a big hit. In addition, the stop design which reminds of the release is called the release design. Also, a symbol (in this embodiment, an odd symbol) that recalls being in a definite variation state may also be referred to as a probability variation symbol, and a symbol (in an even embodiment, in this other embodiment) recalling that it is not a definite variation state. Also known as a non-deterministic symbol.

  Next, the effect control CPU 90101 executes a specific effect setting process of determining presence and type of execution of a specific effect using the effect combination 90201 (step S908002).

  In addition, although description is abbreviate | omitted in this other embodiment, various advance notice effects (for example, step-up notice effect, character notice effect, button notice effect, character thing notice effect, etc., during the fluctuation display of the effect pattern) , Group notice effect, mini character notice effect) may be configured to be executable. In this case, for example, in the effect symbol variation start process, when the advance notice effect setting process for determining the presence / absence and type of the advance notice effect is executed and it is determined to execute the advance notice effect, the notice is made in step S908003 described later. The process table may be selected according to the presentation.

  Next, the effect control CPU 90101 selects a process table according to the fluctuation pattern (step S908003). Then, the effect control CPU 90101 starts the process timer in the process data 1 of the process table selected in step S908003 (step S908004).

  FIG. 57 is an explanatory view of a configuration example of a process table. The process table is a table in which process data to be referred to when the effect control CPU 90101 executes control of the effect device is set. That is, the effect control CPU 90101 controls the effect device (effect component) such as the effect display device 909 in accordance with the process data set in the process table. The process table is composed of data in which a plurality of combinations of process timer set values, display control execution data, lamp control execution data and sound number data are collected. In the display control execution data, data etc. is described which indicates the aspect of each variation constituting the variation aspect during the variable display time (variation time) of the variable display of the effect pattern. Specifically, data relating to the change of the display screen of the effect display device 909 is described. Moreover, the fluctuation time in the aspect of the fluctuation | variation is set to the process timer set value. The effect control CPU 90101 refers to the process table and performs control to display the effect pattern in the variation mode set in the display control execution data only for the time set in the process timer set value.

  The process table shown in FIG. 57 is stored in the ROM of the effect control board 9080. Moreover, the process table is prepared according to each fluctuation pattern.

  In the process table used when effect control is executed for the fluctuation pattern with reach effect, the left symbol is stopped and displayed when the predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, and the right symbol is stopped when the predetermined time has elapsed. Process data indicating that it is to be displayed is set. It should be noted that instead of setting symbols to be stopped and displayed in the process table, images for displaying symbols are generated in combination according to the determined stop symbols and the pseudo stop symbols in the pseudo reunion and the slip effect. May be

  In addition, the effect control CPU 90101 performs effect device (effect component as effect component 909 as effect component, effect component as effect component according to contents of process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1) Control of the various lamps and the speaker 9027 as a part for effect is executed (step S908005). For example, in order to display an image according to the fluctuation pattern on the effect display device 909, a command is output to the VDP 90109. Further, in order to control various lamps to turn on / off, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp driver substrate 9035. Further, in order to perform audio output from the speaker 9027, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio output substrate 9070.

  Note that in this other embodiment, the CPU for effect control 90101 controls variable display of the effect pattern according to the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation pattern command one to one, but the CPU 90101 for effect control changes the fluctuation The variation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to the pattern command.

  Next, the effect control CPU 90101 sets a value corresponding to the fluctuation time specified by the fluctuation pattern command in the fluctuation time timer (step S908006).

  Then, the effect control CPU 90101 sets the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect symbol process (step S90802) (step S908007).

  FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing a specific effect setting process (step S908002) in the effect symbol variation start process. In the specific effect setting process, the effect control CPU 90101 first confirms whether or not the variable display to be started this time is a big hit (step S905001). In addition, it can be determined, for example, by confirming the display result designation command stored in the display result designation command storage area whether or not the variable display to start this time is a big hit. Alternatively, for example, the determination may be made by confirming whether or not the variation pattern command read in step S 908000 specifies a variation pattern for the big hit.

  If the variable display to be started this time is a big hit (Y in step S905001), the CPU 90101 for effect control selects the specific effect determination table for the big hit as a table for determining the presence and type of the specific effect. (Step S905002). If the variable display to be started this time is not a big hit (N in step S905001), the CPU 90101 for effect control selects the specific effect determination table for losing as the table for determining the presence and type of the specific effect (Step S905003). Then, the effect control CPU 90101 executes a lottery process based on random numbers using the specific effect determination table selected in steps S905002 and S905003, and determines the presence / absence and type of specific effect (step S905004).

  FIG. 59 is an explanatory view showing a specific example of the specific effect determination table. Among these, FIG. 59 (A) shows a specific example of the jackpot specific effect determination table selected in step S905002. Further, FIG. 59 (B) shows a specific example of the specific effect determination table for removal selected in step S905003. As shown in FIG. 59, in the specific effect determination table, determination values are respectively assigned to no specific effect, specific effect A, specific effect B, and specific effect C.

  In this other embodiment, as the specific effect, an effect of lighting on the feature LED 90202 provided in the effect character 90201 is executed. In this other embodiment, the specific effect includes the specific effect A ~ There are three types of C, and the specific effect A is an effect of causing the feature LED 90202 provided in the effect role article 90201 to emit light with a white lighting color. Further, the specific effect B is an effect of causing the feature LED 90202 provided in the effect role 90201 to emit light with a red lighting color. Further, the specific effect C is an effect of emitting light by rainbow color display (rainbow display) by sequentially changing the lighting color of the accessory LED 90202 provided in the rendering combination 90201 to emit light.

  Further, in this other embodiment, when performing the specific effect, the suggested effect that suggests the specific effect is performed, but as the suggested effect, the effect of vibrating the push button 90120 is performed. As shown in FIG. 59, in this other embodiment, the vibration time of the push button 90120 differs depending on which type of specific effect is executed, and when the specific effect A is executed, the push is performed. The vibration time of the button 90120 is one second. Moreover, when the specific effect B is executed, the vibration time of the push button 90120 is 3 seconds. When the specific effect C is executed, the vibration time of the push button 90120 is 5 seconds.

  As shown in FIG. 59, in this other embodiment, in the case of a big hit, a judgment value is assigned such that the ratio of executing a specific effect is higher than in the case of a loss. When the specific effect is executed, the expectation (big hit reliability) for the big hit is higher than when the specific effect is not executed.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 59, in this other embodiment, in the case of a big hit, the ratio in which the specific effect B is executed is higher than that in the specific effect A as compared with the case of the off When the specific effect B is executed, the expectation for the big hit (big hit reliability) is higher than when the specific effect B is executed. Further, as shown in FIG. 59, in this other embodiment, the determination value is assigned such that the specific effect C may be executed only in the case of a big hit, and the specific effect C is executed. It will be decided that it will be a big hit. Therefore, when the specific effect C is executed, the degree of expectation for the big hit (big hit reliability) is higher than when the specific effect A or the specific effect B is executed.

  In addition, although this embodiment shows the case where it will be decided that a big hit will be determined if the specific effect C is executed, it is a case where it is not limited to such an aspect, Even if the specific effect C may be configured to be executable at a low rate, at least when the specific effect C is executed, compared to when the specific effect A or the specific effect B is executed, the jackpot for the big hit The degree of expectation (big hit reliability) should be high.

  Moreover, in this other embodiment, when specific effect is performed, it is comprised so that big hit reliability may become high, and it is so that big hit reliability may become high in order of specific effect C, specific effect B, and specific effect A. However, the present invention is not limited to such an aspect. For example, when the specific effect is executed, the reach reliability or the probability change reliability is increased, or the reach reliability or the probability change reliability is increased in the order of the specific effect B and the specific effect A. It is also good.

  Moreover, in this other embodiment, although the case where there are three types of specific effects A to C as types of specific effects, is not limited to such an aspect, for example, one or two types of specific effects It may be configured to be executable only, or may be configured to be able to execute four or more types of specific effects. For example, a type of a specific effect may be provided which causes the accessory LED 90202 provided in the effect role product 90201 to emit light in a blue or green lighting color.

  Moreover, although the case where the kind of specific effect and the vibration time of the push button 90120 correspond one-on-one was shown in this other embodiment, it is not necessarily limited to such an aspect. For example, even if the vibration time of the push button 90120 is one second, it may not necessarily be that the specific effect A is performed, and the specific effect B or the specific effect C may be performed at a low rate. You may configure it.

  Moreover, in this other embodiment, although the case where the vibration time of the push button 90120 is made to differ is shown as a kind of suggestion presentation, it is not restricted to such an aspect. For example, as the type of the suggestion effect, the strength of the vibration operation of the push button 90120 may be made different, or the vibration speed may be made different, or the vibration pattern may be made different (for example, the push button 90120 is made to vibrate continuously. Or may be intermittently oscillated or may be oscillated intermittently). The vibration time, vibration strength, vibration speed, and vibration pattern of the push button 90120 may be combined to constitute a kind of suggested effect.

  Moreover, in this other embodiment, as shown in FIG. 59, although the case where the presence or absence and the type of the specific effect and the suggested effect are different according to whether or not the big hit is made, it is shown I can not. For example, different specific effect determination tables may be selected according to the type of fluctuation pattern designated by the fluctuation pattern command, and the presence or absence or type of specific effect or suggestion effect may be changed. In this case, for example, a variation pattern including Super Reach B is easier to execute a specific effect or a suggestive effect than a variation pattern including Super Reach A, or a specific effect or suggestion effect of a type having a high degree of expectation. It may be configured to be easy to select. Also, for example, a variation pattern having a larger number of pseudo-sequences than a variation pattern having a small number of pseudo-sequences makes it easier to execute specific effects and suggested effects, or selects a type of specific effect or suggestion effect having a high degree of expectation. It may be configured easily.

  Moreover, in this other embodiment, although the case where the suggestion effect is always executed is also shown when the specific effect is executed, the present invention is not limited to such an aspect, and, for example, in FIG. You may comprise so that the specific presentation D which does not accompany the vibration operation of the push button 90120 as a presentation may be provided. Further, not only the vibration operation of the push button 90120 but also the blackout display, the turning off of the frame LED 9028 and the lighting of the button LED 90360 may not be performed, or any one of them. It may be configured not to perform a plurality or all.

  Also, in this other embodiment, as shown in FIG. 59, the case of collectively determining the presence and the type and the specific effects and the suggested effects in one lottery process is shown, but the specific effects and the suggested effects are shown. And may be determined in separate lottery processes. Then, by determining the specific effect and the suggested effect in separate lottery processes, a pattern that executes both the specific effect and the suggested effect, and a pattern that executes only the specific effect (the specific effect is not to be noticed too much It may be configured such that there is a pattern to be executed) and a pattern to execute only the suggested effect (a so-called pattern of pattern).

  When it is determined to execute the specific effect (step S905005), the effect control CPU 90101 sets a specific effect execution flag according to the type of the determined specific effect (step S905006). For example, when it is determined to execute the specific effect A, the specific effect A execution flag is set, and when it is determined to execute the specific effect B, the specific effect B execution flag is set, and the specific effect C is When it is decided to execute, the specific effect C execution flag is set.

  FIG. 60 and FIG. 61 are flowcharts showing a process (step S90802) during effect symbol variation in the effect control process. In the effect symbol variation processing, the effect control CPU 90101 first subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step S908101) and subtracts 1 from the value of the variation time timer (step S908102). When the process timer times out (step S908103), the process data is switched. That is, the process timer set value set next in the process table is set in the process timer (step S908104). Also, the control state of the rendering device is changed based on the display control execution data, lamp control execution data and sound number data set next to the display control execution data (step S908105).

  Next, the effect control CPU 90101 confirms whether any one of the specific effect execution flags (any of the specific effect A execution flag to the specific effect C execution flag) is set (step S908106). If no specific effect execution flag is set, the process moves to step S908126. If one of the specific effect execution flags is set, the effect control CPU 90101 checks whether or not it is time to start dark display (blackout display) (step S908107). In addition, it can be determined by, for example, checking the value of the fluctuation time timer set in step S908006 of the effect symbol fluctuation start processing whether or not it is the start timing of dark display. If it is time to start the dark display (Y in step S908107), the effect control CPU 90101 starts dark display (blackout display) of the entire display screen of the effect display device 909 (step S908108) and the frame LED 9028. Are all turned off (step S908109). Then, the process proceeds to step S908126.

  If it is not the start timing of dark display (N in step S908107), the effect control CPU 90101 confirms whether it is the start timing of the suggested effect (step S908110). In addition, it can be determined, for example, by confirming the value of the fluctuation time timer set in step S908006 of the effect design fluctuation start processing whether or not it is the start timing of the suggestion effect. Further, in this other embodiment, it is assumed that the start timing of the suggestion effect comes at a timing when a predetermined time (1 second in this example) has elapsed after the start timing of the dark display.

  If it is time to start the suggested effect (Y in step S908110), the effect control CPU 90101 starts driving the vibrator motor 90126 and starts the vibration operation of the push button 90120 as the suggested effect (step S908111). . Further, the effect control CPU 90101 sets a value corresponding to the vibration time according to the type of the specific effect in the vibration time timer for measuring the vibration time of the push button 90120 (step S908112). For example, if the specific effect A execution flag is set, a value corresponding to 1 second is set in the vibration time timer, and if the specific effect B execution flag is set, the vibration time timer is 3 seconds. Is set, and if the specific effect C execution flag is set, a value corresponding to 5 seconds is set in the vibration time timer. Further, the effect control CPU 90101 starts the lighting display of the button LED 90360, and starts the lighting display of the push button 90120 as a suggested effect (step S908113). Then, the process proceeds to step S908126.

  In the other embodiment, the process of step S908113 is performed to display the button LED 90360 in a lit state, but the button LED 90360 is displayed in a blinking manner, not limited to such a mode. May be Further, for example, the button LED 90360 may be made to emit light in various lighting colors or may be emitted in various lighting patterns, and according to the big hit expectation degree, the reach expectation degree, the probability change expectation degree, the button LED 90360 is drawn. It may be determined in which lighting color or lighting pattern light is emitted.

  If it is not the start timing of the suggested effect (N in step S908110), the effect control CPU 90101 confirms whether or not the value of the vibration time timer is 0 (step S908114). If the value of the vibration time timer is not 0 (N in step S908114), that is, if the push button 90120 is vibrating, the effect control CPU 90101 subtracts 1 from the value of the vibration time timer (step S908115) and subtracts it. It is checked whether the value of the subsequent oscillation time timer is 0 (step S908116). If the value of the vibration time timer is 0 (that is, when the vibration time of the push button 90120 is ended), the effect control CPU 90101 stops driving the vibrator motor 90126 and pushes as a suggested effect. The vibration operation of the button 90120 is finished (step S908117), the lighting display of the button LED 90360 is finished, and the lighting display of the push button 90120 as the suggestion effect is finished (step S908118). Then, the process proceeds to step S908126.

  If the value of the vibration time timer is 0 (Y in step S908114), the CPU 90101 for effect control checks whether or not it is the start timing of the specific effect (step S908119). In addition, it can be determined, for example, by checking the value of the fluctuation time timer set in step S908006 of the effect design fluctuation start processing whether or not it is the start timing of the specific effect. Further, in this other embodiment, it is assumed that the start timing of the specific effect comes at a timing when a predetermined time (1 second in this example) has elapsed after the vibration time of the push button 90120 ends.

  If it is the start timing of the specific effect (Y in step S908119), the effect control CPU 90101 starts the lighting display of the feature LED 90202 provided in the effect role 90201 in the display color according to the type of the specific effect Then, the execution of the specific effect is started (step S908120). For example, when the specific effect A execution flag is set, an effect of causing the feature LED 90202 provided in the effect role product 90201 to emit light in a white lighting color is started. In addition, if the specific effect B execution flag is set, the effect of causing the feature LED 90202 provided in the effect role article 90201 to emit light in red lighting color is started. Further, if the specific effect C execution flag is set, the effect LED 90202 provided in the effect character 90201 is changed in order to emit light by changing the lighting color and the effect of emitting light by rainbow color display (rainbow display) is started Do. Then, the process proceeds to step S908126.

  If it is not the start timing of the specific effect (N in step S908119), the CPU 90101 for effect control checks whether or not it is the end timing of the specific effect (step S908121). In addition, it can be determined, for example, by confirming the value of the fluctuation time timer set in step S 908 006 of the effect design fluctuation start processing whether or not it is the end timing of the specific effect. Further, in this other embodiment, after the vibration time of the push button 90120 is ended, the start timing of the specific effect comes at a timing when a predetermined specific effect (in this example, 5 seconds) has passed. Do. In addition, you may comprise so that the production | presentation time of specific presentation may not be limited to 5 seconds, for example, and may perform specific presentation over 7 seconds or 10 seconds.

  If it is the end timing of the specific effect (Y in step S908121), the effect control CPU 90101 ends the dark display (blackout display) on the effect display device 909 (step S908122) and also displays the variation of the effect pattern. Accordingly, the lighting display of the frame LED 9028 is resumed (step S908123). Further, the effect control CPU 90101 ends the lighting display of the feature LED 90202 provided on the effect combination 90201 and ends the execution of the specific effect (step S908124). Further, the effect control CPU 90101 resets the set specific effect execution flag (one of the specific effect A execution flag to the specific effect C execution flag) (step S908125). Then, the process proceeds to step S908126.

  Note that this other embodiment shows the case where the dark transition display (blackout display) is ended or the lighting display of the frame LED 9028 is resumed at the timing of the end of the specific effect, but this other embodiment It is not limited to the embodiment shown in the form. For example, the dark display (blackout display) may be ended or the lighting display of the frame LED 9028 may be resumed during the vibration operation of the push button 90120 or at the timing of the vibration operation termination, or the feature LED 90202 of the effect role 90201 The dark display (blackout display) may be ended or the lighting display of the frame LED 9028 may be resumed at the start of the lighting display or at the timing during the lighting display. Also, for example, the dark display (blackout display) may be ended or the lighting display of the frame LED 9028 may be resumed after a predetermined time (for example, one second) has elapsed after the specific effect is ended, and various aspects are Conceivable.

  In this other embodiment, although the case where the execution timing of the suggestion effect or the specific effect is the same is shown regardless of the type of the suggested effect or the specific effect, the present invention is not limited to such an aspect. For example, it is possible to execute the suggested effect or the specific effect at a plurality of execution timings, such as performing the suggested effect or the specific effect during high-speed fluctuation, performing it at the reach establishment, performing during the reach, etc. Good. Further, in this case, for example, the jackpot expectation degree, the reach expectation degree, and the probability change expectation degree may be made different depending on at which execution timing the suggestion effect or the specific effect is executed.

  Then, if the fluctuation time timer has timed out (step S908126), the effect control CPU 90101 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect symbol fluctuation stop process (step S90803) (step S908127).

  FIG. 62 is a flow chart showing the effect symbol fluctuation stop process (step S90803) in the effect control process. In the effect symbol fluctuation stop process, the effect control CPU 90101 first confirms whether a stop symbol display flag indicating that the stop symbol of the effect symbol is displayed is set (step S908301). If the stop symbol display flag is set, the process proceeds to step S908305. In this other embodiment, when the big hit symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the effect symbol, the stop symbol display flag is set in step S908304. When the fanfare effect is executed, the stop symbol display flag is reset. Therefore, the fact that the stop symbol display flag is set means that the big hit symbol has been stopped and displayed but the fanfare effect has not yet been executed, so the process of displaying the stop symbol of the effect symbol in step S908302 is executed. Then, the process proceeds to step S908305.

  When the stop symbol display flag is not set, the effect control CPU 90101 performs control to stop and display the determined stop symbol (discard symbol, big hit symbol) (step S908302).

  Next, when neither the big hit symbol nor the small hit symbol is displayed in the process of step S908302 (that is, when the off symbol is displayed) (N in step S908303), the CPU 90101 for effect control shifts to step S908311. Do.

  When the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the process of step S908302 (Y in step S908303), the effect control CPU 90101 sets a stop symbol display flag (step S908304).

  Next, the effect control CPU 90101 confirms whether or not any of the big hit start designation commands has been received (step S908305). Note that whether or not any jackpot start designation command has been received, specifically, a flag (big hit start designation command reception flag) indicating that the jackpot start designation command set in the command analysis process has been received, This determination can be made by checking whether a flag (small hit / suddenly sudden change big hit start specified command reception flag) indicating that the small hit / sudden sudden change big hit start specification command has been received is set. If one of the big hit start designation commands has been received, the effect control CPU 90101 resets the stop symbol display flag (step S908306), and selects the process table according to the fanfare effect (step S908307). If the big hit start designated command reception flag or the small hit / suddenly definite big hit big start start designated command reception flag is set, the effect control CPU 90101 resets the set flag.

  Then, the effect control CPU 90101 starts the process timer by setting the process timer set value in the process timer (step S908308), and the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number Control of the rendering device (a rendering display device 909 as a rendering component, various lamps as a rendering component, and a speaker 9027 as a rendering component) is executed according to data 1 and movable member control data 1) (step S908309). Thereafter, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value according to the big hit display process (step S90804) (step S908310).

  If it is determined that neither the big hit nor the small hit is made (N in step S908303), the effect control CPU 90101 responds to the fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process (step S90800) for the value of the effect control process flag. The value is updated (step S908311).

  Next, the specific example of the production | presentation aspect of suggestion production and specific production is demonstrated. FIG. 63 is an explanatory view showing a specific example of the effect mode of the suggested effect and the specific effect. In FIG. 63, the display screen changes in the order of (1) (2) (3).

  As shown in FIG. 63 (1), in the effect display device 909, it is assumed that the variable display of the left middle right effect design is being executed, and the execution of the specific effect is decided at the start of the fluctuation. When the start timing of dark display (blackout display) comes, as shown in FIG. 63 (2), dark display (blackout display) of the entire display screen of the effect display device 909 is started (see step S908108), The frame LEDs 9028 are all turned off (see step S908109).

  In the example shown in FIG. 63, there is shown a case where the entire display screen of the effect display device 909 is completely dimmed in the case of performing the dimmed display (blackout display), but such an embodiment is limited Absent. For example, even in the dark display (blackout display), when the fourth symbol in the fourth symbol display area 909c, 909d is continuously displayed, or it is configured to display some small symbols The small symbol may be continuously displayed, or when it is configured to perform rightward display indicating a rightward operation, the rightward display may be continuously displayed. As such, even during dark display (blackout display), it may be configured to continue to display information necessary for the progress of the game.

  Then, when the start timing of the suggested effect comes, as shown in FIG. 63 (3), the vibration operation of the push button 90120 as the suggested effect is started (see step S908111) and the lighting display of the button LED 90360 is started, The lighting display of the push button 90120 as the suggestion effect is started (see step S908113). In this case, when the push button 90120 is vibrated, the member to be vibrated 90303 inside the push button 90120 is also vibrated, and the vibration of the member to be vibrated 90303 is emphasized and visually recognized.

  Then, when the vibration time of the push button 90120 ends, as shown in FIG. 63 (4), the vibration operation of the push button 90120 as the suggestion effect ends (see step S908117) and the lighting display of the button LED 90360 ends. Then, the lighting display of the push button 90120 as the suggestion effect is ended (see step S908118).

  Then, when the start timing of the specific effect comes, as shown in FIG. 63 (5), the lighting display of the bonus LED 90202 provided in the effect role article 90201 is started, and the execution of the specific effect is started (see step S908120) ). In this case, for example, in the case where the specific effect A is executed, an effect of causing the accessory LED 90202 provided in the effect role product 90201 to emit light in a white lighting color is started. Further, if the specific effect B is executed, an effect of causing the feature LED 90202 provided on the effect role article 90201 to emit light with a red lighting color is started. Further, if the specific effect C is executed, the effect of causing the rainbow LED display (rainbow display) to emit light starts by changing the lighting color of the accessory LED 90202 provided in the effect role article 90201 and emitting light in order Be done.

  Then, after the effect time of the specific effect (five seconds in this example) elapses and the specific effect end timing comes, the lighting display of the bonus LED 90202 provided on the effect role object 90201 is ended, and the specific effect is The execution is ended (see step S908124). Further, the dark display (blackout display) on the effect display device 909 is also ended (see step S908122), and the lighting display of the frame LED 9028 is also resumed according to the fluctuation display of the effect symbol (see step S908123).

  As described above, according to this other embodiment, a rendering device capable of performing rendering (in this example, rendering combination 90201), and an operable movable body (in this example, push button 90120) And Further, it is possible to execute a specific effect (in the present example, the specific effect shown in FIG. 63 (5)) in the vicinity of the movable body using the effect device, and the movable body can be operated when the specific effect is performed. (In this example, after the vibration operation of the push button 90120 shown in FIG. 63 (3), the specific effect shown in FIG. 63 (5) is executed). Therefore, the rendering effect of the specific rendering can be improved.

  Specifically, in this other embodiment, since the presentation combination 90201 as a presentation device is provided below the game area 907, it is important to make the light emission of the feature LED 90202 of the presentation combination 90201 to some extent Although this can be done, it is not clear which area of the game area 907 the player should pay attention to before the light emission, and there is a possibility that the effect of the specific effect can not be obtained sufficiently. Therefore, in this other embodiment, the push button is vibrated by operating (in the present example, vibrating operation in the present example) the movable body (in the present example, the push button 90120) provided in the vicinity of the rendering combination 90201. The gaze of the player can be guided to the specific effect by directing the eye to 90120, and the effect of the specific effect can be improved.

  Note that "when specific effect is executed" means that, in the other embodiment, specifically, a predetermined time (one second in this example) elapses after the vibration operation of the push button 90120 is finished. The specific effect is to be executed at the specified timing. As described above, the specific effect may be executed after a relatively short time (1 second in this example) elapses after the end of the vibration operation of the push button 90120, or the vibration of the push button 90120 may be generated. The operation and the specific effect may be performed at exactly the same timing, or the vibration time of the push button 90120 and the effect period of the specific effect partially overlap (for example, after the vibration operation of the push button 90120 is started, The execution of the specific effect may be started during the vibration operation). Thus, "when the specific effect is executed" means that at least the vibration operation of the push button 90120 and the specific effect, even if the execution timing of the vibration operation of the push button 90120 and the execution timing of the specific effect are identical or not identical. And may be executed at a timing that can be recognized as being executed correspondingly.

  Moreover, although the case where the rendering device (in this example, the rendering combination 90201) is provided on the game board 906 is shown in this other embodiment, the present invention is not limited to such an aspect. For example, the effect combination used for the specific effect may be provided on the play space near the push button 90120.

  Further, “in the vicinity of the movable body” means, for example, an area A where the effect display device 909 is provided, an area B where the effect role product 90201 is provided, and a push button 90120. If the region is region C, the distance between regions BC may be shorter than the distance between regions AB. With such a configuration, since the effect role article 90201 is provided in a region where the distance from the push button 90120 is shorter than the distance from the effect display device 909 where the player's line of sight is usually considered to be facing, It is possible to effectively guide the player's gaze.

  Further, “in the vicinity of the movable body” may be configured such that, for example, the distance between the regions BC is shorter than the size of the display screen of the effect display device 909. For example, when the size of the display screen of the effect display device 909 (liquid crystal display device) is 15 inches (38.1 cm), the distance between the regions BC is configured to be less than 38.1 cm. It is also good. With such a configuration, the effect role product 90201 and the push button 90120 are disposed in an area narrower than the size of the entire display screen of the effect display device 909 that the player usually pays attention to. The line of sight can be effectively guided.

  Moreover, in this other embodiment, as an aspect of the rendering device in the vicinity of the movable body, a case is shown in which the rendering role object 90201 is provided relatively close to the push button 90120 via the out port 9026. Not limited to such an aspect. For example, even if it is on the game area 907, it may be configured such that the rendering combination 90201 is provided immediately above the push button 90120, and as described above, the rendering combination on the game frame near the push button 90120 An object 90201 may be provided. Further, the movable body such as the push button 90120 and the effect role product 90201 may be integrally configured. As such, “in the vicinity of the movable body” means that the movable body such as the push button 90120 is provided at such a distance that the line of sight of the player can be guided to the specific effect using the effect combination 90201. Good.

  Moreover, although the case where the rendering device used for the specific rendering is the rendering combination 90201 provided with the feature LED 90202 is shown in this other embodiment, the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, the specific effect may be performed in some form using a lamp / LED provided in a specific area as the effect device, a sub liquid crystal display device, or the like.

  Moreover, although this embodiment shows the case where the movable body is the push button 90120, the present invention is not limited to such an aspect. For example, it may be configured to include a movable member operable as a movable body within a predetermined operation range, and configured to perform the suggested rendering by operating the movable member provided in the vicinity of the rendering device. .

  Further, according to this other embodiment, it is possible to execute the specific effect after the movable body is operated (in this example, after the vibration operation of the push button 90120 shown in FIG. 63 (3) Execute the specific effect shown in 5). Therefore, the specific effect can be focused on before the start of the specific effect.

  In this other embodiment, after stopping the vibration operation of the push button 90120, after a predetermined time (one second in this example) has elapsed, the special feature LED 90202 of the effect combination 90201 is turned on and displayed. Although the case where execution is started is shown, it is not restricted only to such an aspect. For example, the vibration operation of the push button 90120 may be ended after the accessory LED 90202 of the rendering combination 90201 is lighted and displayed during the vibration operation of the push button 90120. Even with such a configuration, since the vibration operation of the push button 90120 has already started before the start of the specific effect, the specific effect can be focused before the start of the specific effect. Further, for example, the feature LED 90202 of the effect role article 90201 may be lit and displayed simultaneously with the stop of the vibration operation of the push button 90120 to start execution of the specific effect, and various modes are conceivable.

  Further, in this other embodiment, after the dark display (blackout display) on the effect display device 909 is started, the vibration operation of the push button 90120 is started after a predetermined time (one second in this example) has elapsed. Although the case is shown, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, the vibration operation of the push button 90120 may be started simultaneously with dark display (blackout display) or turning off the frame LED, and various modes are conceivable.

  Further, according to this other embodiment, the movable body is the operation means (in this example, the push button 90120) operable by the player, and vibrates the operation means when the specific effect is performed. (In this example, after the vibration operation of the push button 90120 shown in FIG. 63 (3), the specific effect shown in FIG. 63 (5) is executed). In addition, the operation means includes a decorative member (in this example, a vibrated member 90303 shown in FIGS. 28 and 29) capable of visually recognizing the vibration operation. Therefore, it is possible to guide the player's gaze to a specific effect by sight and touch.

  Although this embodiment shows the case where the decoration member (in this example, the vibration receiving member 90303) is included in the push button 90120, the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, the push button 90120 does not have to be built in, and some decoration member may be provided in the vicinity of the push button 90120. Then, for example, the vibration operation of the push button 90120 may be transmitted, and the decoration member provided in the vicinity may also be vibrated. As long as the vibration operation of the push button 90120 can be emphasized in such a manner.

  Moreover, according to this other embodiment, when the specific effect is executed, the display means is darkened (in this example, as shown in FIG. 63 (2), the entire display screen of the effect display device 909 is displayed). Display in black (black out). In addition, the movable body can be operated with the light emitter for presentation (in this example, the frame LED 9028) turned off (in the present example, as shown in FIG. 63 (3) While being displayed (blackout display), the push button 90120 is vibrated in a state where all the frame LEDs 9028 are turned off). Therefore, it is possible to more effectively guide the player's gaze to a specific effect. Specifically, in the other embodiment, the effect display device 909 is displayed in a dark state (blackout display) and nothing is displayed, and all the frame LEDs 9028 of the game frame are also turned off. The vibration operation can be made more noticeable, and the line of sight of the player can be effectively guided to a specific effect.

  Although this embodiment shows the case where all the frame LEDs 9028 are turned off as a light emitter for effect, the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, it is not necessary to turn off all the lamps and LEDs provided in the gaming machine, but some of the plurality of lamps and LEDs may be turned off, and one lamp or LED (for example, a light emitting area) May be configured to turn off only the lamps and LEDs that are particularly noticeable. Further, in this other embodiment, even when the frame LED 9028 is turned off, when the suggestion effect is performed, the button LED 90360 of the push button 90120 is lit to emphasize the push button 90120. Although shown, the button LED 90360 may also be configured to be turned off while the frame LED 9028 is turned off.

  Further, according to this other embodiment, the movable body is provided with a plurality of types of operation modes including at least the first operation mode (for example, the vibration time 1 second) and the second operation mode (for example, the vibration time 3 seconds). It is possible to operate (see FIG. 59). The execution mode of the specific effect differs depending on whether the movable body is operated in the first operation mode or the second operation mode (for example, as shown in FIG. 59, vibration time 1). When the vibration operation of the second push button 90120 is performed, the specific effect A is performed, and when the vibration operation of the push button 90120 with the vibration time of 3 seconds is performed, the specific effect B is performed). Therefore, the operation mode of the movable body can also be noticed.

  Although this other embodiment shows a case where the type of the specific effect to be performed is different depending on the operation mode of the movable body (in this example, the vibration time of the push button 90120), the key is not limited to such mode I can not. For example, the presence or absence of the execution of the specific effect may be different depending on the operation mode of the movable body (in this example, the vibration time of the push button 90120). As such, it is only necessary that the execution mode (the presence or absence and the type of execution) of the specific effect differs depending on the operation mode of the movable body in any form.

Another embodiment 2.
In the first other embodiment, the display area is configured to be capable of displaying a predetermined display in a predetermined area which is difficult for the player to visually recognize in the display area, and a visual line guidance effect for guiding the visual line of the player to the predetermined area It may be configured to be executable. Hereinafter, a second other embodiment configured to be able to execute gaze guidance effect will be described.

  In the other embodiment, the detailed description of the parts having the same configuration and processing as those of the first other embodiment is omitted, and the parts different from the first other embodiment are mainly described. explain.

  First, aspects of the effect display device 909 and the accessory 9050 according to the other embodiment will be described. On the game board 906, the character 9050 is fixed by a screw (screw), an adhesive or the like (not shown). The character 9050 is a member having an L-shaped cross section including a portion 9050A protruding forward from the game board 906 and a portion 9050B depending downward from the tip of the protruding portion (see FIG. 65 and the like). As shown in FIG. 64 and FIG. 65, the part 9050 covers the upper area 905B which is a part other than the lower area 905A of the display area of the effect display device 909 from the front, as shown in FIG. Therefore, the upper area 905B is a part of the portion 9050B when the player looks at the effect display device 909 from the front (when sitting in a chair and looking at a normal posture to play a game) (when looking at a first posture) It is a hidden area that can not be viewed unless it is hidden behind and invisible and the player does not look in from below (if the player does not take the second posture). The display area of the effect display device 909 is composed of an upper area 905B and a lower area 905A (an area that can be viewed when the effect display device 909 is viewed from the front).

  Moreover, in this other embodiment, when the advance notice setting process is executed in the effect design change start process (step S90801) of the effect control process process and it is decided to execute the advance effect, the effect pattern change is performed. The process table corresponding to the notice effect is selected in step S908003 of the start process, and the process of step S908005 of the effect pattern change start process and the process during the effect pattern change (step S90802) are executed according to the process table according to the notice effect. As a result, during the variable display of the effect pattern, a notice effect of giving a notice of the degree of expectation for execution of the super reach, the degree of expectation for a big hit, and the like is performed (see FIGS. 66 to 68). The notice effect is an effect of displaying a mini image, and the combination of the displayed mini images gives notice of the degree of expectation that the super reach is executed and the degree of expectation of a big hit. The advance presentation is performed before reaching the reach. In this other embodiment, mini images A to C are prepared as mini images to be displayed in the notice effect (see, for example, FIG. 66). Each mini-image travels a different path (see FIG. 66).

  In the display area of the effect display device 909, areas Z901 to Z903 are set as areas for displaying mini images (see FIG. 67 and the like). One mini image may be displayed in each area. The mini image moves in the area Z901 if the displayed area is the area Z901, moves in the area Z902 if the displayed area is the area Z902, and the displayed area is the area Z903. If so, the area is moved within the area Z903.

  The area Z 901 is disposed at the boundary between the lower area 905 A and the upper area 905 B (see, for example, FIG. 67). Accordingly, when the effect display device 909 is viewed from the front, the mini-image displayed in the area Z901 (moving in the area Z901) is hidden behind the character 9050 (part 9050B) or from the back of the character 9050. It appears and appears. The player sees such a mini-image and thinks that there may be something behind the character 9050 (upper area 905B), and tries to peek at it (by mini-image, the player's gaze is at the top Guiding to the region 905 B).

  The area Z 902 is disposed in the lower left area (lower left area) of the lower area 905 A (see, eg, FIG. 67). The mini-image displayed in the area Z902 (moving in the area Z902) can always be viewed when the effect display device 909 is viewed from the front.

  The area Z 903 is disposed in the right area (the area toward the right) of the upper area 905 B (see, for example, FIG. 67). Since the upper area 905 B is an area hidden by the accessory 9050, the area Z 903 can not be viewed when the effect display device 909 is viewed from the front. The mini-image displayed in the area Z903 (moving in the area Z903) is visually recognized as the line of sight is induced by the mini-image displayed in the area Z901 (by the player looking from below).

  When only one type of mini-image is displayed, an expectation (probability) that super reach will be performed is foretold. Specifically, by displaying only one mini image A, it is possible to predict the degree of expectation that Super Reach A will be performed. Similarly, by displaying only one to three mini images B, the degree of expectation for executing the super reach B is notified, and by displaying only one to three mini images C, the super reach is displayed. The degree of expectation that C is to be executed is announced. As the number of mini images increases, the degree of expectation (proportion of corresponding super reach execution) is higher (confirmed by three).

  When multiple types of mini images are displayed, the jackpot expectation is foreshadowed. Specifically, the mini image A and the mini image B are displayed, the mini image A and the mini image C are displayed, the mini image B and the mini image C are displayed, and the mini images A to C are displayed. All will be displayed, and the big hit expectation will be foretold by each combination. When the mini images A to C are displayed, "big hit" is determined, and the probability of big hit is high in the order of mini image B + mini image C> mini image A + mini image C> mini image A + mini image C.

(Example of production screen)
Next, an example of the effect screen according to this another embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 66 to 68. FIG. In FIG. 67 and the like, the downward arrows drawn in the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, 905R indicate that the decorative symbol is changing.

(Motion of mini images)
The mini images A to C displayed in the regions Z901 to Z903 move as shown in FIG. For example, the mini-image A reciprocates in the oblique direction (FIG. 66 (A)). The mini image B moves so as to draw a square locus (FIG. 66 (B)). The mini-image C moves so as to draw a substantially triangular locus (FIG. 66 (C)). Thus, the mini-images A to C have different movements. In addition, each of the mini images A to C performs the same movement regardless of which of the regions Z901 to Z903 is a display position.

(Example of the effect screen of the notice effect that makes the target of the expectation that super reach will be executed for the notice)
FIG. 67A shows an effect screen when the preview effect for displaying the mini-image A in each of the regions Z901 to Z903 is executed. FIG. 67B shows an effect screen when the preview effect for displaying the mini-image B in each of the regions Z901 to Z903 is executed. FIG. 67C shows an effect screen when the preview effect for displaying the mini-image C in each of the regions Z901 to Z903 is executed. In the notice effects shown in FIGS. 67 (A) to 67 (C), since three mini images are displayed, respectively, confirmation of execution of the corresponding super reach is given notice.

  When the effect display device 909 is viewed from the front (hereinafter also referred to simply as a front view), the lower part of the area Z901 and the Z902 are visible, but the upper part of the area Z901 and the area Z903 are in the upper area 905B. I can not see it because it is hidden in the character 9050. Since the mini-image displayed in the area Z 901 moves across the invisible upper portion and the visible lower portion, it hides or appears behind the character 9050 (the downward extending portion 9050 B). The player sees the movement of the mini-image and looks at the upper area 905 B (in particular, the area Z 903) hidden in the character 9050 in the display area of the effect display device 909 from below (the player's The gaze is guided by the movement of the mini-image). For this reason, the interest of the game is improved.

  Further, since the area Z903 can not be visually recognized when viewed from the front, a notice effect in which one mini image is displayed in each of the areas Z901 to Z903 and a notice effect in which one mini image is displayed in each of the areas Z901 and Z902 The appearance of the preview effect in the front view is the same (mini images are displayed in the area Z901 and the area Z902). Therefore, it is difficult to determine whether two mini images or three mini images are displayed (that is, whether or not the third mini image is displayed), and the player uses the area Z 903 as a feature. By checking from the bottom of 9050, it is checked whether three mini images are displayed (that is, whether the execution of the corresponding super reach is finalized). For this reason, the interest of the game is improved.

  Similar to the above description, the preview effect in which one mini image is displayed in each of the areas Z901 and Z3 and the preview effect in which one mini image is displayed in the area Z901 have the same appearance when viewed from the front Therefore, the player looks in the area Z 903 from below the character 9050 and checks whether two mini images are displayed (that is, there is a high possibility that the corresponding super reach will be executed). Check). For this reason, the interest of the game is improved.

(Example of the effect screen of the notice effect that targets the big hit expectation degree for the notice)
FIG. 68A shows an effect screen when a preview effect of displaying the mini-image A in the area Z901 and displaying the mini-image B in the area Z902 is performed. FIG. 67B shows an effect screen when a preview effect of displaying the mini-image A in the area Z901, displaying the mini-image B in the area Z902, and displaying the mini-image C in the area Z903 is executed. In the notice effect shown in FIG. 68, since the mini images A to C are displayed, the big hit is confirmed.

  As in the case of FIG. 67, since the mini-image displayed in the area Z901 moves across the invisible upper portion and the visible lower portion, it hides or appears behind the accessory 9050 (the downward extending portion 9050B). The player sees the movement of the mini-image and looks at the upper area 905 B (in particular, the area Z 903) hidden in the character 9050 in the display area of the effect display device 909 from below (the player's The gaze is guided by the movement of the mini-image). For this reason, the interest of the game is improved.

  As in the case of FIG. 67, the area Z 903 can not be visually recognized when viewed from the front, so the appearance of the notice effect in the front view is the same between the notice effect shown in FIG. 68A and the notice effect shown in FIG. (A mini image A is displayed in the area Z 901, and a mini image B is displayed in the area Z 902). Therefore, the player looks in the area Z 903 from the bottom of the character 9050 to check whether or not the last mini-image C is displayed (that is, the variable display being executed is determined as a "big hit"). Check if there is). For this reason, the interest of the game is improved.

(Effects of other embodiments, etc.)
As described above, according to another embodiment, a mini-image may be displayed in the upper area 905 B (here, the area Z 903 in this case) which is hidden by the accessory 9050 and can not be visually recognized (as in FIG. 67 and the like). Then, the player looks into the upper region 905 B by the movement of the mini image displayed in the region Z 901 (hidden behind the character 9050 or appearing from the back of the character 9050, etc.). Thus, in this other embodiment, the player's line of sight is placed in the upper area 905 B (here, the area Z 903) by the movement of the mini-image (hidden in the character 9050 or appears from the character 9050). It can be induced and the interest of the game is improved. Note that such an effect of directing the player's line of sight (here, an effect by the movement of the mini image) is also referred to as a line-of-sight induction effect.

  Moreover, in this other embodiment, there are a plurality of types of mini images (in particular, mini images displayed in the area Z901 and the area Z903), and furthermore, there are also a plurality of types of motion of the mini image (here, mini The movement differs depending on the type of image) (eg, FIG. 66). Thereby, the effects are diversified and the interest of the game is improved. Further, in this other embodiment, the mini-image displayed in the area Z901 constitutes a notice effect, and the degree of expectation that the super reach is executed and the degree of big-hit expectation are announced by the type of the mini-image, etc. The player pays attention to the type of the mini-image (that is, the player also pays attention to the aspect of the gaze guidance effect), and the interest of the game improves.

  In addition, since the anticipation of the super reach is performed and the anticipation of the big hit are notified by the combination of the mini images displayed in the areas Z901 to Z903 (upper and lower areas 905B) by the notice effect, the player can A mini-image is searched over the display screen of the display device 909. Thereby, the interest of the game is improved.

  Further, by hiding the upper area 905B including the upper part of the area Z901 and the area Z903 with the character 9050, the player is made to look down from the bottom, so that the range of effects is expanded and the interest of the game is improved.

  Further, in this other embodiment, the appearance of the notice effect when viewed from the front (whether or not the mini image is displayed in the areas Z901 and Z902, etc.), and the execution mode of the notice effect in the lower area 905A Yes, the player does not know the content of the notice (in this case, the degree of expectation for the super reach to be executed or the degree of the big hit expected) for which the advance notice effect in progress is given notice, and the player can play the area Z903. It is only after confirmation that it can be understood. Therefore, the effect of the advance effect is enhanced, and the interest of the game is improved.

  Note that it is also possible to configure a gaming machine by appropriately combining the configurations shown in the first other embodiment and the second other embodiment shown above. For example, in the case where the configuration shown in the first other embodiment is applied to the configuration shown in the second other embodiment, part of the liquid crystal display device (effect display device 909) is A mini image such as a character image is displayed on the back side of the character 9050 provided so as to cover up and displayed so that a part thereof protrudes from the back of the character 9050 (for example, a character image in the area Z901 May be displayed so as to appear or disappear, and the character 9050 may be configured to oscillate and vibrate. In this case, (1) the character 9050 pays attention to the character 9050 by oscillating movement and (2) next, the character image displayed in the region 1 to be displayed is noted, (3) next, the character The visual line of the player may be guided in stages in the order of focusing attention on the character image displayed in the area Z 903 hidden behind the object 9050.

  In the above other embodiment, the variation time and the type of reach effect, the presence or absence of pseudo-series (effect of temporary stop and re-variation of one or more symbols performed during one variable display, etc.) In order to notify the microcomputer 90100 of the variation pattern indicating the variation aspect of the variation pattern, an example is shown in which one variation pattern command is transmitted when the variation is started, but the variation pattern is indicated by two or more commands. The effect control microcomputer 90100 may be notified. Specifically, when notified by two commands, the microcomputer for gaming control 90560 is the first command before reaching reach, such as presence or absence of pseudo sequence, presence or absence of slippery effect (if it does not reach, so-called Send a command indicating the fluctuation time and fluctuation mode before the second stop, and as the second command after reaching a reach (such as reach type or presence / absence of re-lottery effect) (when it does not reach, so-called A command indicating a fluctuation time or a fluctuation mode) after the second stop may be transmitted. In that case, the effect control microcomputer 90100 may perform effect control in the variable display (variable display) based on the fluctuation time derived from the combination of two commands. The game control microcomputer 90560 may notify the fluctuation time by each of the two commands, and the effect control microcomputer 90100 may select a specific fluctuation mode to be executed at each timing. . When transmitting two commands, two commands may be transmitted within the same timer interrupt, and after a first command has been transmitted, a predetermined period has elapsed (for example, the next The second command may be transmitted in the timer interrupt). Note that the variation mode indicated by each command is not limited to such an example, and the order of transmission may be changed as appropriate. By notifying the variation pattern with two or more commands in this way, it is possible to reduce the amount of data that needs to be stored as the variation pattern command.

  Further, in the above-mentioned other embodiments, “the proportions are different” means that only the ones having different proportions such as A: B = 70%: 30% or A: B = 30%: 70%. It is also a concept including ones having different proportions in a relationship such as A: B = 100%: 0% (ie, one in which one is 100% allocation and the other is 0% allocation).

  In the other embodiment described above, for example, the case of variably displaying a plurality of types of special symbols, effect symbols, and normal symbols of “1” to “9” and deriving and displaying the display result is shown, but the variable display is Not limited to such an aspect. For example, the symbol to be variably displayed and the symbol to be derived and displayed do not necessarily have to be the same, and a symbol different from the symbol displayed to be variably displayed may be derived and displayed. Moreover, it is not necessary to variably display a plurality of types of symbols, and variable display may be performed using only one type of symbol. In this case, for example, the variable display may be performed by alternately repeating lighting and blinking of the one type of symbol display. And even in this case, one kind of symbol used for the variable display may be derived and displayed at the end, or a symbol different from the one kind of symbol is finally derived and displayed It may be one.

  Further, in the above-described other embodiment, a pachinko machine has been exemplified as a gaming machine, but according to the present invention, a medal is inserted, a predetermined bet number is set, and a plurality of game machines are operated according to the operation of the control lever. A slot machine in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player when the combination of the stop symbols becomes a combination of specific symbols when the symbols of the type are rotated and the symbols are stopped according to the operation of the stop button by the player. It is also possible to apply.

  In addition, the gaming machine according to the present invention is not limited to a gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of prizes as gaming media, but is a type that encloses gaming media such as gaming balls and gives a score when prize giving conditions are satisfied. It can also be applied to a game machine of the formula type.

  Also, in the other embodiment described above, the gaming machine is controlled to a definite change state after the big hit game end based on the fact that there is a definite variation big hit or a big hit as a big hit classification and a definite variation big hit as a big hit classification. However, it is not limited to such a gaming machine. For example, a special variable winning prize ball device having a predetermined probability variation area provided therein (a probability variation area may be provided in a special variable prize winning ball device provided with only one, or a plurality of special variable winning prize balls provided The probability change area may be provided in a part of the device, and the probability change is determined based on the fact that the game ball has passed the probability change area in the special variable winning prize ball device during the big hit game, the big hit game The configurations shown in the other embodiments described above can also be applied to a gaming machine that is controlled to be in a positive change state after completion.

  The present invention is suitably applied to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine which allows a player to play a predetermined game.

1 ... pachinko gaming machine 2 ... gaming board 3 ... gaming machine frame 4A, 4B ... special symbol display device 5 ... image display device 6A ... ordinary winning ball device 6B ... ordinary variable winning ball device 7 ... special variable winning ball device 8L, 8R ... Speaker 9 ... Game effect lamp 11 ... Main board 12 ... Effect control board 13 ... Voice control board 14 ... Lamp control board 15 ... Relay board 20 ... Normal symbol display 21 ... Gate switch 22A, 22B ... Start port switch 23 ... Count switch 31A ... stick controller 31B ... push button 100 ... microcomputer for game control 101, 121 ... ROM
102, 122 ... RAM
103 ... CPU
104, 124 ... random number circuit 120 ... CPU for effect control
123 ... Display control unit 125 ... I / O
901 ... Pachinko machine 908a ... 1st special symbol display 908b ... 2nd special symbol display 909 ... effect display device 9013 ... 1st start winning opening 9014 ... 2nd starting winning opening 909a ... 1st pending storage display portion 909b ... Second reserve memory display unit 9020 ... special variable winning ball device 9031 ... game control board (main board)
9056 ... CPU
90560 ... microcomputer for game control 9080 ... effect control board 90100 ... microcomputer for effect control 90101 ... CPU for effect control
90109 ... VDP
90120 ... push button 90122 ... stick controller 90126 ... motor for vibrator 90201 ... effect work 90202 ... function LED
90303 ... vibration receiving member 90360 ... button LED

Claims (1)

It is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state, having display means.
A rendering device capable of performing rendering,
An operable movable body,
A specific effect execution unit capable of executing a specific effect in the vicinity of the movable body using the effect device;
Movable body control means for operating the movable body;
While performing the suggestion effect which suggests whether it will be controlled to the above-mentioned advantageous state by the mode of the effect performed by a predetermined production means, the presentation auxiliary display related to the suggestion effect can be executed by the display means Equipped with a certain suggestion effect execution means,
The movable body control means is capable of operating the movable body when the specific effect is performed,
The suggestion effect executing means can execute the effect auxiliary display at different positions according to whether or not a specific condition is established.
A game machine characterized by